Maserati - E-Class Wagon - Brochure - 2023 - 2023

Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. É2135840823\ËÍ 2135840823 Order no. P213 1786 13 Part no. 213 584 08 23 Edition B-2023 E-Class Wagon Digital – in the vehicle E-Class Wagon Operator's Manual Front passenger air bag warning & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team ©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. Vehicle manufacturer Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany Air bag warning sticker for USA and Canada As at 25.02.22 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before your first drive, please read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases. Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The following documents are components of the vehicle: R Digital operator's manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment R Supplementary documents Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Mercedes-Benz Group AG Company 2135840823 2135840823 2 Contents Symbols .......................................................... 5 At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 10 Overhead control panel ................................. 12 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 14 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 16 Digital Operator's Manual .............................. 18 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ........ 18 General notes ............................................... Protection of the environment ....................... Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ Operator's Manual ........................................ Mercedes me app ......................................... Service and vehicle operation ........................ Operating safety ............................................ Notes on mounting the license plate on the front license plate holder ......................... Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components ........................... 20 20 20 21 22 22 23 25 26 Diagnostics connection ................................. Qualified specialist workshop ........................ Correct use of the vehicle ............................. Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. Problems with your vehicle ............................ Reporting safety defects ................................ Limited Warranty ........................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... 26 27 28 Occupant safety ............................................ Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 36 36 38 42 50 51 64 Opening and closing ...................................... SmartKey ...................................................... Doors ............................................................ Cargo compartment ...................................... 66 66 70 74 28 28 29 29 30 30 34 Side windows ................................................ Sliding sunroof .............................................. Roller sun blinds ............................................ Anti-theft protection ...................................... 80 83 87 88 Seats and stowing ......................................... 92 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .... 92 Notes on grab handles .................................. 92 Seats ............................................................ 93 Steering wheel ............................................ 106 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 107 Memory function ......................................... 109 Stowage areas ............................................ 110 Sockets ....................................................... 125 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .... 126 Installing and removing the floor mats ......... 128 Light and visibility ........................................ Exterior lighting ........................................... Interior lighting ............................................ Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ 129 129 137 139 143 Area on the windshield permeable to radio waves ................................................. 146 Infrared-reflective windshield function ......... 146 Climate control ........................................... 147 Overview of climate control systems ............ 147 Operating the climate control system .......... 148 Driving and parking ..................................... Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ Automatic transmission ............................... Function of 4MATIC ..................................... Refueling ..................................................... Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems ............... Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 154 154 169 172 176 176 178 186 242 Instrument display and on-board computer ........................................................... 243 Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer .......................................... 243 Overview of instrument display .................... 244 Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... Operating the on-board computer ................ Overview of displays on the instrument display ........................................................ Head-up Display .......................................... 245 245 MBUX multimedia system ............................ Overview and operation ............................... System settings .......................................... Navigation ................................................... Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me app ....................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... Radio & media ............................................. Sound settings ............................................ 250 250 260 264 273 277 284 288 295 Maintenance and care ................................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... Maintenance Management .......................... Telediagnosis .............................................. Engine compartment ................................... Cleaning and care ....................................... 296 296 297 297 298 305 247 247 Contents 3 Breakdown assistance ................................. Emergency .................................................. Flat tire ....................................................... Battery (vehicle) .......................................... Tow starting or towing away ........................ Electrical fuses ............................................ 312 312 313 319 324 328 Wheels and tires ......................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................. Tire pressure ............................................... Loading the vehicle ..................................... Tire labeling ................................................ Definition of terms for tires and loading ....... Changing a wheel ........................................ Emergency spare wheel ............................... 332 Technical data ............................................. Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ...................................... Regulatory radio identification and notes ..... 332 332 333 333 338 343 348 350 360 362 362 362 364 4 Contents Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. 365 Operating fluids ........................................... 366 Vehicle data ................................................ 374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps .......................................................... 375 Display messages ........................................ 375 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 429 Index .......................................................... 446 Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols: & WARNING Danger due to failure to observe the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Display field in the Instrument Display/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit At a glance – Cockpit 1 Steering wheel paddle shifters → 174 G è ECO start/stop function → 166 2 Combination switch → 130 H c Active Parking Assist → 237 3 Instrument display → 244 I É Sets the vehicle level → 224 4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 172 J DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 170 5 Media display → 250 K PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 47 6 Start/stop button → 155 L Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 245 7 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applications → 253 M Adjusts the steering wheel manually → 106 8 Climate control systems → 147 N Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 106 9 Glove box → 113 → 107 A £ Hazard warning light system → 131 B Stowage compartment → 113 C Touchpad → 253 On-board computer → 245 Cruise control → 195 H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 199 D 8 Controller for volume and switching sound on/off → 250 E Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off → 250 F ü Lowers the head restraints → 97 ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/off O Control panel: P Diagnostics connection → 26 Q Opens the hood → 299 7 8 At a glance – Cockpit R ! Electric parking brake → 183 S Light switch → 129 10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps Instrument display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 1 #! Turn signal lights → 130 C ! ABS → 441 2 6 Restraint system → 431 D Ù Electric power steering → 432 3 å ESP® OFF → 441 E h Tire pressure monitoring system → 444 ÷ ESP® → 441 → 433 4 R Rear fog light → 130 F 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator 5 K High beam → 130 G Fuel level → 244 L Low beam → 129 H Electric parking brake (red) → 437 T Standing lights → 129 6 ÿ Coolant temperature → 433 7 Coolant temperature display → 244 → 437 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 437 9 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 437 → 437 J ü Seat belt → 431 A # Electrical malfunction → 433 K ; Engine diagnostics → 433 B L Distance warning → 440 L ä Suspension → 440 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only F USA only ! Canada only I Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only 11 12 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 137 → 137 2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 137 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 3 S Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off → 137 9 Eyeglasses compartment → 277 A 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 4 G SOS button 83 5 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 137 3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 83 6 ; me button → 277 → 144 B Inside rearview mirror 13 14 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment B W Opens/closes the left side window → 80 100 C Opens the door → 70 102 D V Operates the memory function → 110 70 E Adjusts the head restraints → 96 74 F Configuring the seat settings → 98 G Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position → 93 96 1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 95 2 w Switches the seat heating on/off → 3 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 4 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 5 q Opens/closes the tailgate → 6 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 143 7 W Opens/closes the right side window → 80 H Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 8 W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 80 I Adjusting the seat backrest inclination → 93 9 T Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 64 J Adjusts the seat height → 93 A W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 80 15 16 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 B-pillar with: → 131 information label on fuel type → 176 335 7 £ Hazard warning lights → 30 2 Safety vests → 312 3 ; me button → 277 information label on tire pressure → → 277 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 30 → QR code for accessing the rescue card G SOS button 8 Fuel filler flap with: 366 9 Tow-starting or towing away → 325 → 322 A Warning triangle → 312 5 Tow-starting or towing away → 325 B TIREFIT kit → 315 6 Flat tire → 313 C First-aid kit (soft sided) → 313 4 Checking and adding operating fluids Starting assistance 17 18 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Õ R R R R R R The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle. Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. Messages: receive additional information about the messages on the Instrument Display. Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks. Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Back Adds bookmarks Picture Contents section Directions of movement of contents section Menu Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, suchas warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Digital Operator's Manual Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system: Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated while driving. 19 20 General notes Protection of the environment + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is correct. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style. Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regulations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. General notes * NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: R doors R door pillars R sill R seats R cockpit R instrument display R center console R lateral roof frame # # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service. 21 Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 365) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts. Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual and the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Operator's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries. R The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date. Note that your vehicle may not have all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. 22 General notes The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance. The Operator's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Mercedes me app Notes about the on-demand feature You can also activate various functions (ondemand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle. Information is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me Requirements R The vehicle has a wireless connection. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. Ordering and activating on-demand feature Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store. # Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle. # Speeding up activation # Switch the vehicle off and lock it. # Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system. If the activation was not successful, repeat the process. Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R unleaded fuel may not be available for vehicles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R the fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an authorized Mercedes‑Benz Service Center, or write to one of the following addresses: in the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 General notes in Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the MercedesBenz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the 23 Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet. Possible danger due to substances hazardous to health Change of address or change of ownership In compliance with Proposition 65 (“Prop65”), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if necessary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Operating safety & WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs car- 24 General notes ried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked component parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and electronic component parts or their software. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". & WARNING Risk of fire caused by flammable material on hot exhaust system components Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on an unpaved road or offroad, check the vehicle underside regularly. # In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pothole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the General notes underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system & DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of highvoltage components after an accident. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high-voltage components. These components are marked with a high-voltage label: 25 All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on mounting the license plate on the front license plate holder * NOTE Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect mounting of the license plate on the front license plate holder If the license plate is incorrectly mounted on the front license plate holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail. 26 General notes Observe the following points when mounting the license plate on the front license plate holder: # Mount the license plate directly on the license plate holder without advertising media or other holders. # Mount the license plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the license plate adapter. Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference. (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the devices." "Les émetteurs/récepteurs dans cette véhicule sont conforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : 1) Ces appareils ne doivent pas produire de brouillage; 2) Ces appareils doivent accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected in a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you use and connect only products approved by an authorized MercedesBenz Service Center. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. General notes # # # Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 159). 27 Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant work R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components 28 R General notes Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz Service Center. Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this Operator's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and ‑regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: General notes Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590, USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from https://www.safercar.gov. Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. 29 If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels Limited Warranty * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. 30 General notes This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage. QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally. Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. General notes Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorized to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the air bag control unit, for example. Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operat- ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored: R operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R system reactions in special driving situations, such as air bag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R information on events leading to vehicle damage In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as break- 31 down services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. 32 General notes Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R seat and steering wheel positions R suspension and climate control settings R individual settings, such as interior lighting Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of Internet services These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers. Online services General notes Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which is collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third-party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data. Data protection rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. 33 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event Data Recorder USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. 34 General notes The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating; R Whether or not the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, R How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the spe- cial equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: the EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Copyright Free and open source software Information on licenses for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Registered trademarks R R R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. General notes R R R R R R R R R ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Mercedes‑Benz Group AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microsoft® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. 35 36 Occupant safety Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following components: R Seat belt system R Air bags R Child restraint system R Child seat anchors The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying. Limitations of the protection provided by the restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Occupant safety Restraint system functionality When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an accident How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors that can be seen and measured only after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive 37 role in air bag deployment, nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts that are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact 38 R Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The front passenger air bag can be deployed in an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct (/ page 47). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered or an air bag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlorate, for example. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can provide the best level of protection only if it is worn correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 92). Occupant safety In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the center of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear passenger compartment seats The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the cargo compartment are not equipped with a special seat belt retractor. Activate or deactivate the special seat belt retractor of the seat belt (/ page 55). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52). Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 110). 39 Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. 40 # Occupant safety Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint system. & WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorage The restraint effect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. # Before starting a journey, make sure that there are no objects between the front seat and the door. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. R R & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. Occupant safety # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 2 of the corresponding seat. # To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position. # To engage the seat belt outlet: release button 3 and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages. % A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 38). # * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device. # 41 Only buckle the seat belts as intended. % Observe the notes on stowage areas (/ page 110). Information on installing a child restraint system and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 55). Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 42). 42 Occupant safety Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment. Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passengers doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Airbags Overview of air bags 1 2 3 4 5 6 Driver's knee air bag Driver's air bag Front passenger air bag Front passenger knee air bag Window air bag Side air bag The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an air bag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Occupant safety Potential protection provided by each air bag: Knee air bag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's air bag, front passenger air bag: head and ribcage R Window air bag: head R Side air bag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants R * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 61). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Information on the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff Only when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off can the front passenger air bag deploy in the event of an accident. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct (/ page 47). 43 * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # # Store objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the detected accident situation, the window air bag on the front passenger side may deploy. The air bag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. 44 Occupant safety Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a correctly fastened seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 92). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 52). R Always stow and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessories, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. Occupant safety R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limitations of the protection provided by air bags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag If you change the cover of an airbag or attach objects, e.g. even stickers, to it, the airbag may no longer function as intended. # Never modify the cover of an airbag. # Do not attach any objects to the cover. The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 42). Objects in the deployment area of an air bag may prevent the air bag from functioning correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat. # Always stow and secure objects correctly. # Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers If you use unsuitable seat covers, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff could be restricted. # 45 You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection. 46 # Occupant safety Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed air bags replaced immediately. Status of the front passenger front airbag ▌Function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger air bag and front passenger knee bag are enabled or disabled accordingly. & WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. # # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 61). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 61). A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 38). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. The front passenger air bag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in Occupant safety R R # accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. The person is seated correctly. ▌Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger air bag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger air bag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 47). Self-test of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff When the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps simultaneously light up during the self-test. 47 The status of the front passenger air bag is displayed after the self-test via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps: R ON is lit: the front passenger air bag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger air bag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger air bag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. When the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of the front passenger air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light may be lit continuously or off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger air bag 48 Occupant safety shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 61). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. # Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, Occupant safety # adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 61). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger air bag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. 49 If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 61) 50 Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® system Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Backing up the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre- emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is canceled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limits The system will not initiate any action in the following situations: R when backing up The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R whilst driving or Occupant safety R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual (/ page 376)display message will appear. Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog- nize potential risks and avoid dangers if children are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 52). Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing a child restraint system. Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, 51 Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. 52 Occupant safety Observe standards for child restraint systems All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX mounting brackets R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Installing an ISOFIX child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 56). A child booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a child booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Always secure a child restraint system correctly & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. Occupant safety # & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly mounted or unsecured, it may come loose. The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. Unused child restraint systems could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported in the vehicle unused. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: Installing the ISOFIX child restraint system on the right and left rear seats (/ page 56). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 59). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 61). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 61). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation (/ page 47). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. - Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. R R 53 Do not modify the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. 54 Occupant safety It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Avoid direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # # # Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe when stopping or parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. Occupant safety Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat anchor ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 58). Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation (/ page 47). R Notes on the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 46). Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 58). Activating or deactivating the child seat safety feature of the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # 55 Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Installing a child restraint system When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. # 56 Occupant safety Activating the child seat safety feature # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the child seat safety feature is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. Deactivating the child seat safety feature # Press the release button of the seat belt buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the left and right rear seats ▌Installing an ISOFIX//LATCH child restraint system on the left and right rear seats & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded. Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child is secured in a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with integrated seat belt, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 73 lb (33 kg). Occupant safety Always comply with the information about the mass of the child: R in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. ® When installing an ISOFIX//LATCH child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1 on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. 57 O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat surface and/or be installed facing in the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. 58 Occupant safety * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system # # # # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. Remove and stow away covers 1. Attach the ISOFIX//LATCH child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. After removing the child seat, reattach covers 1. Fastening a Top Tether 1 ISOFIX mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX//LATCH child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are installed The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries. # # Always lock rear seat backrests after installing Top Tether belts. Observe the lock verification indicator. If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (left and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehicle. Occupant safety # # # # # # # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 98). Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or beltsecured child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Guide Top Tether belt 5 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards between combined cargo cover and net 3 and seat backrest 2. Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt 5 into Top Tether anchorage 4 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 5. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 98). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 5. 59 Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ▌Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. 60 Occupant safety If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 58). O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearwardfacing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a weight category I forwardfacing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. O O O O After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing in the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the cargo compartment are not equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 55). # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of Occupant safety the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet. ▌Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 61). Always observe the status of the front passenger air bag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 47). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger air bag is enabled. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. 61 ▌Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 61). O Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle; this will result in restrictions on the 62 Occupant safety maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing in the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 55). & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic co-driver air bag shutoff. # Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is installed correctly. # # # # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. # # # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Occupant safety Child-proof locks # ▌Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example # 63 Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. 64 Occupant safety ▌Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door % Vehicles with folding bench seat: the switch for opening the tailgate located on the righthand wheel arch when viewed in the direction of travel will also be secured. R Notes on pets in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Occupant safety Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended. # Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier. 65 66 Opening and closing SmartKey Overview of key functions # # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields # Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Vehicle key with panic alarm 1 Locking 2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocking 4 Opens/closes the tailgate 5 Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the key battery (/ page 68). The key locks and unlocks the following components: R doors R Fuel filler flap R Tailgate If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is armed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality. Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements R The vehicle is switched off. # or # To activate: press button 1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. Press the start/stop button. A key belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle. Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap R To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options when the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked. # # To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. 67 Deactivating the function of the key Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions will also be deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO will then no longer be possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time. # To deactivate: press and hold the ß key button. # With the ß button pressed, immediately press the Ü key button twice in quick succession. The indicator light on the key will light up once briefly and once for a long time. # To activate: press any button on the key. 68 Opening and closing % When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the center console, the function of the key will be activated automatically (/ page 156). Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key Inserting the emergency key # Press release button 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. # + If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Replacing the SmartKey battery & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to swallowing batteries # # # Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 will be pushed out slightly. Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position. Press release button 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2. Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury! # Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. # If the lid and/or the battery compartment do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Opening and closing Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. # Remove the emergency key element (/ page 68). # # the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this. Push in battery compartment 3. Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshooting You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # # Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery. Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in # # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68). Use the replacement key. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 73). Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 69 There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the SmartKey is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metallic objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. You have lost a SmartKey. # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. 70 Opening and closing Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside # # To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. The locking pin pops up when the rear door is unlocked. To open a rear door: pull the rear door handle again. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside To unlock: press button 1. To lock: press button 2. % The buttons are also on the front passenger door. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle will not be unlocked: R if you have locked the vehicle using the key R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESSGO # # Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO Requirements The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is operated are closed. R # To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked. Opening and closing % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 82). If you open the tailgate from outside, it is automatically unlocked. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate R R # When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deactivated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Observe the notes: on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 305) R on using a high-pressure cleaner (/ page 306) 71 R # # # # To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed. # # # # Activate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 67). Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 73). 72 # Opening and closing Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R while the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. Power closing function & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically # # To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. Opening and closing 73 Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key. % If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key, this triggers the burglar alarm system. # # # # # Remove the emergency key (/ page 68). Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover. Pull and hold the door handle. Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. Release the door handle. # # # To unlock: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1. To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1. Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. 74 Opening and closing Cargo compartment Opening the tailgate # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 77). & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning * NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle # If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again immediately. If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate. # # Pull remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate opens. or # Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. Opening and closing # Vehicles with folding bench seat: Pull button 1 for the tailgate twice. The tailgate will be unlocked. If the tailgate has been locked from the outside, or the child safety lock has been activated, the tailgate cannot be unlocked from the inside using button 1. Closing the tailgate & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the tailgate will not be locked. Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the following situation: R You have locked the vehicle and close the tailgate while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. # 75 To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. 76 Opening and closing # Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehicle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 77). # # Switch on the power supply or the vehicle. Push remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate is fully closed. # Press closing button 1 on the tailgate. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the tailgate. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked. Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R Towards the end of the closing procedure R Opening and closing In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle. HANDS-FREE ACCESS function Observe the notes when opening (/ page 74) and closing (/ page 75) the tailgate. % Two warning tones will sound when the tailgate is opening or closing. & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement will trigger the opening or closing process alternately. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate R R # or When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. 77 78 # Opening and closing Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The key is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg. The tailgate may open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable or luggage R Clamping straps, tarp or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 67) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations. Opening and closing Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to a point shortly before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position. # Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened. Requirements R The rear seat backrest has been folded forward. R The combined cargo cover and net has been removed. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. Deactivating the opening angle limiter Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short acoustic signals sound. # # Remove the emergency key (/ page 68). # 79 Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked. Emergency release of the tailgate from inside (vehicles with folding bench seat) 80 # # Opening and closing Press the cover down in the direction of arrow 1 and remove by pulling in the direction of arrow 2. Pull the emergency release lever in the direction of arrow 3. The tailgate will be unlocked. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. 1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. Opening and closing # # To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. 81 Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Requirements R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. # Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions will be performed: R The vehicle will be unlocked. R The side windows will be opened. R The sliding sunroof will be opened. Opening and closing 82 R R The panoramic sliding roof will be opened. The seat ventilation of the driver's seat will be switched on. % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind will be opened first. # To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Requirements R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Press and hold the ß button on the key. The following functions will be performed: R The vehicle will be locked. R The side windows will be closed. R The sliding sunroof will be closed. R The panoramic sliding roof will be closed. # To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button. # To continue convenience closing: press and hold the ß button again. % Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 70). # Resolving problems with the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows Opening and closing If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66). # Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 68). Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # 83 Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. 84 # # Opening and closing When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. * NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be restricted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed. # If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof. 1 Raise 2 Open 3 Close/lower Use the 3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind. Opening and closing The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed. # To start automatic operation: press or pull the 3 button beyond the point of resistance and release it. # To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: the automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised. Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: the automatic opening and raising features are available only when the sliding sunroof is closed. Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R Towards the end of the closing procedure. R During resetting. # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. 85 or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. 86 # Opening and closing Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards. % By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering". Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: Opening and closing # Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: The sliding sunroof is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof. Resetting the sliding sunroof # Push the 3 button up to the point of resistance repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is fully open. # Press the 3 button for another second. # Close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. # # 87 Always move the roller sun blind by hand. Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and rear side windows opened at the same time. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Roller sun blinds Extending the rear side window roller sunblinds * NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window. 88 Opening and closing Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sunblind The immobilizer will automatically be activated when the vehicle is switched off and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (but the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. # To extend or retract: press button 1. Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ▌Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the tailgate is opened R when the hood is opened Opening and closing R R when interior protection is triggered (/ page 90) when the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 89) R 89 after you press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 156) % If the battery is heavily discharged, the burglar alarm system will automatically be deactivated for the benefit of the next engine start. The ATA system will be armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations: R after you lock the vehicle with the key R after you lock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO ▌Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the key. or # Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 156) Indicator lamp 1 will flash when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R after you unlock the vehicle with the key R after you unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle. Function of tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all countries. 90 Opening and closing An audible and visual alarm will be triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm will automatically be armed after approximately 60 seconds: R after you lock the vehicle with the key R after you lock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm will be armed only when the following components are closed: R Doors R Tailgate The tow-away alarm will automatically be deactivated: R after you press the Ü or p button on the key R after you press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 156) R after you unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO R when you are using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 185). Activating/deactivating the tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to activate or deactivate the tow-away alarm. Function of interior protection % This function may not be available in all countries. When interior protection is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Interior protection is armed only when the following components are closed: R doors R tailgate Interior protection is automatically deactivated: R after pressing the Ü or p button on the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 156) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Opening and closing The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R when there are moving objects suchas mascots in the vehicle interior R if a side window is open R if the sunroof is open R if the panoramic sunroof is open Activating/deactivating interior protection Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. Interior protection is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate interior protection. 91 92 Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. R R R R Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's air bag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instrument display clearly You have a good overview of the traffic conditions Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 38). Notes on grab handles & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. Seats and stowing # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat Seats Adjusting the front seat manually and electrically (without Seat Comfort Package) When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle". Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. 93 Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. 94 Seats and stowing Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. & WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. # When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat. Seats and stowing Adjusting the front seat electrically * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. 1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft position # # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Head restraint height Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-aft position 95 96 # Seats and stowing Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 110). Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest. Head restraints ▌Adjusting the front seat head restraints manually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # 1 2 3 4 Higher Softer Lower Firmer Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. Seats and stowing ▌Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints manually # # 97 To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. Ensure that the head restraint is engaged correctly. ▌Lowering the rear seat head restraints from the front # # # # To raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards. To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards. # # To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left side bolster 2. To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards. # Press button 1. 98 Seats and stowing ▌Mechanical adjustment of rear head restraints ▌Installing/removing the outer rear seat head restraints Removing # Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Installing Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages. # Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort # # To raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. # # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 113). Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. 5 Seat Comfort Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions. Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters. Seats and stowing # Adjust the air cushions for the desired seat. Setting the seat heating balance # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. Setting automatic seat adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If a person is in danger of becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by: # a) Tapping the warning message on the media display. % This setting is available only for individual user profiles. For the guest profile, automatic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or off. b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. Adjusting the driver's seat position to body size The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat position will be adjusted to the body size that has been set. % If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the buttons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches. or # 99 Requirements R Adapting the driver's seat position to body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment Switching automatic seat adjustment on/off When the active user profile is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mirrors and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver. # Select On or Off. 100 Seats and stowing % You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronizing user profiles . Setting the easy entry and exit feature # Activate or deactivate the function. % If you use an individual user profile and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position . R R R R R Overview of massage programs R R Hot Relaxing Back Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Hot Relaxing Shoulder Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Activating Massage Activating massage program with upward-moving relaxing waves. Classic Massage Calming back massage program. Wave Massage Regenerating massage program via relaxing waves across the back and in the seat cushion. Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing massage program with upward-moving relaxing waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. Active Workout, Backrest and Active Workout, Cushion These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it. Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 100). # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High Intensity on or off . Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select Î for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt. Switching the seat heating on/off & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. Seats and stowing 101 In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly. * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off. # 102 Seats and stowing Setting the panel heating Folding bench seat in the cargo compartment Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Panel Heating When the seat heater is switched on, the armrests and the center console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or off. ▌Notes on the folding bench seat & WARNING Risk of injury when the seat backrest is not upright and locked in position The seat backrest of the folding bench seat may fold down while the vehicle is in motion. In this case, the seat belts may not perform their intended protective function. # Make sure that the seat backrests of the rear bench seat are locked in the upright position. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. Observe the notes on "Seat belts" (/ page 42), "Head restraints" (/ page 96) and "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52). The folding bench seat is approved for use only with child seats designed for children up to six years old . Information on suitable child restraint systems on the folding bench seat can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Seats and stowing 103 The folding bench seat may be used only when the combined cargo cover and net is installed. The tailgate can be opened from the folding bench seat. The switch is located on the wheel arch on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. ▌Folding out the folding bench seat Requirements: R The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are locked in the upright position. R The handle for the combined luggage cover and net has been moved up. To improve the rear view, the upper part of the plate has been folded down. # # # # Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat backrest of the folding bench seat upwards. Hook the seat belts into retainers 3. Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of the seat backrest. Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of the folding bench seat into the seat position. 104 Seats and stowing # # Push down the seat cushion until the seat backrest engages fully. Fold the head restraints upwards. ▌Folding back the folding bench seat * NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat when folding back The folding bench seat may be damaged when it is folded back. # Fully insert the head restraints into the guides. # Make sure that the seat belt buckles engages in their guides. # # # Press release knob 3 and fold the head restraints down. Press release knob 4 and push the head restraints all the way in. Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding bench seat into its starting position. ▌Opening/closing the cargo compartment floor & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor If you drive with the cargo compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey. # Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and fold it back into its starting position until it engages. Opening # Press the release knob in the middle of the cargo compartment floor and turn it to the OPEN position. Seats and stowing 105 Pull the loop on the cargo compartment floor and fold the cargo compartment floor up. % When the seat cushion is removed (/ page 105), you can remove the cargo compartment floor completely. Installing # Closing Re-insert the cargo compartment floor, if necessary, and fold it down. # Press the release knob and turn it to the CLOSE position. # ▌Removing or installing the seat cushion If you want to open the cargo compartment floor while the folding bench seat is folded back, you must first of all remove the seat cushion. # To remove: fold seat cushion 2 vertically upwards and remove it from seat cushion guide 1. # # Push seat cushion 2 into seat cushion guide 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3. Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting position 4 until it engages. 106 Seats and stowing Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually # # & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Unlocking You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel. Locking Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the steering wheel. # Adjusting the steering wheel electrically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # # Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go. Seats and stowing 107 Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature 1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 110). # Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped. # Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat. 108 Seats and stowing If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process is stopped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's seat will move back in the following situations: R You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off. % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last driving position in the following cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed. R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on. The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch off the vehicle. R Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function. Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process. Seats and stowing 109 Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function. Memory function Function of the memory function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. # If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. & WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off. Seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up display 110 Seats and stowing Operating the memory function Storing # To call up: press or briefly hold memory position switch 4, T or U. After you release the switch, all systems will be moved into the stored position. Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. # # Set the desired position for all systems. Press the memory button V and then press memory position switch 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal will sound. The settings are stored. Objects in the deployment space of an air bag may prevent the air bag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on protection provided by the air bag (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. Seats and stowing 111 There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. # Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. & WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell Objects in the driver's footwell and frontpassenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # # # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell. Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another. Vehicles with automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff: objects trapped under the frontpassenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 46). & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear armrest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight. # The rear armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed. # Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open. 112 Seats and stowing & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor If you drive with the cargo compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey. * NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can catch fire if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter. R children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects. # # # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. % Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties, e. g. differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material malfunctions. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including load and occupants). The values are Seats and stowing 113 R R R R specified on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. When transporting objects in the cargo compartment, always install the combined cargo cover and net (cargo compartment cover and partitioning net). Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Secure the load using the cargo tie-down rings and distribute the load evenly. Notes on driving with a roof load R Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle. R Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 169). % For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior ▌Overview of the front stowage compartments 1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with USB ports and stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with a USB port 4 Glove box Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold) ▌Folding the rear seat backrest forwards & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. 114 Seats and stowing If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the driver's display. Requirements: R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. You can fold the center and outer seat backrests forwards separately. The right seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the center seat backrest. The outer seat backrests are unlocked electrically. # # Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision. To fold the left and right seat backrests forward: pull right or left button 1. # # To fold the center seat backrest forwards: pull release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 forwards. Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. Seats and stowing 115 ▌Folding back the rear seat backrest ▌Locking the release catch of the center rear seat backrest * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest Requirements R The left and center seat backrests are engaged and joined together. The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest. # Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one part of the seat backrest in the rear passenger compartment is folded back, the corresponding front seat will automatically return to the most recent original position. You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the cargo compartment against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then only be folded forwards together with the left seat backrest. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the driver's display. Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. 116 Seats and stowing ▌Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backrests (cargo position) To enlarge the cargo compartment, you can adjust the seat backrests so that they are 10° steeper (cargo position). # Push seat backrest 2 back to bracket 1 until the backrest engages. Cargo compartment cover with partition net (combined cargo cover and net) ▌Notes on the cargo compartment cover & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects # # # Fold the center and left seat backrests forwards. To lock: slide catch 1 upwards. The release catch of the center seat backrest will be locked. To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards. # # Fold seat backrest forwards (/ page 113). Move bracket 1 in the direction of the arrow. The cargo compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover. Seats and stowing 117 * NOTE Damage to the cargo compartment cover when loading the vehicle ▌Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover The cargo compartment cover may be damaged when the vehicle is being loaded. # Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the cargo compartment cover. The cargo compartment cover and the partitioning net form the combined cargo cover and net. When the cargo compartment cover is clipped in, no objects in the cargo compartment should obstruct the lowering movement of the cover when the tailgate is closed. The cargo compartment cover will otherwise be raised again automatically. # To extend: pull cargo compartment cover 1 back by handle 2 and clip it into the brackets on the left and right. The cargo compartment cover raises automatically when the tailgate is opened and lowers again when the tailgate is closed. Retracting # Remove cargo compartment cover 1 from the brackets on the left and right. # Guide cargo compartment cover 1 forwards by handle 2 until it is fully retracted. The handle strip of the retracted cargo compartment cover 1 can be used in the following positions: 1 Folded up by 45° (loading position) 2 Horizontal position (driving position) 3 Folded down and locked in place (rattle-free position when driving) ▌Installing/removing the combined cargo cover and net Requirements: R The cargo compartment cover and partition net are retracted. 118 Seats and stowing Removing Remove the combined cargo cover and net from the cargo compartment, or from the left-hand rear door if the seat backrests are folded forwards. # First, detach the combined cargo cover and net from left-hand catch 1 and then remove it from right-hand bracket 4. Requirements: R The seat backrests are folded forwards. Installing Slide the combined cargo cover and net into right-hand bracket 4 as far as it will go. # Place the combined cargo cover and net into the left-hand bracket and slide it into catch 1 until the combined cargo cover and net engages audibly. Red lock verification indicator 3 must no longer be visible. # ▌Attaching the combined cargo cover and net to the rear seat backrest * NOTE Damage to the combined luggage cover and net when attaching it to the seat backrest # # Press button 2. Fold the combined cargo cover and net backwards with the seat backrest folded up. When the combined luggage cover and net is attached to the seat backrest, it may be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Do not fold the seat backrests back. # Insert combined cargo cover and net 2 into both guides 1 and push it as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow. To disassemble the combined cargo cover and net, follow the instructions in reverse order. Seats and stowing 119 ▌Attaching the partitioning net & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects Partitioning net without cargo compartment enlargement Partitioning net with cargo compartment enlargement The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the partitioning net. For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfill their protective functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. # # Pull the partitioning net far out towards the rear from the rear bench seat using tab 1. Hook the partitioning net into eyelets 2, first on the left, then on the right. # # Guide the partitioning net upwards using tab 1. Hook the partitioning net into eyelets 2. 120 Seats and stowing Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 110). Overview of bag hooks & WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 110). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg) and do not attach any goods to them. 1 Cargo tie-down rings 1 Bag hook Attaching the parcel net & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around Seats and stowing 121 and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. # Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # # Fold up the tie-down eyes. Hook parcel net 1 into the front and rear tiedown eyes. EASY-PACK load-securing kit ▌Notes on the EASY-PACK load-securing kit The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your cargo compartment for a variety of purposes. The components are located in the stowage space under the cargo floor. 1 Bag containing the brackets and luggage holder 2 Telescopic rod 122 Seats and stowing ▌Inserting the brackets into the load rail # # Press locking button 4. Bracket 1 has been secured in the selected position in load rail 5. If necessary, fold tie-down eye 2 upwards. ▌Installing or removing the luggage holder Requirements: R Select a load size that can be secured by the luggage holder. The luggage holder is used to secure loads against the side wall of the cargo compartment to prevent them from moving around. You can subject the load holder to a maximum load of 15.4 lbs (7 kg). # # # # Insert bracket 1 into the center of load rail 5. Press release knob 3 and slide bracket 1 into the desired position in load rail 5. Let go of release knob 3. # # # Insert two brackets 5 into the load rail (/ page 122). Press and hold release knob 1 on luggage holder 2. Pull the belt on the handle out slightly. Let go of release knob 1. Seats and stowing 123 Installing # Press and hold release knob 3 of first bracket 5. # Insert luggage holder 2 into first bracket 5 and slide it downwards until it engages. # Let go of release knob 3. # Repeat the process with second bracket 5 and the handle. Loading # Press and hold release knob 1 on luggage holder 2. # Pull the belt on the handle out. # Place the load between the strap and the cargo compartment side wall. # Press and hold release knob 1 on luggage holder 2. # Hold the belt on the handle firmly and slowly guide it back until the load has been secured. # Let go of release knob 1. # On both brackets 5, press locking button 4. # To remove: press release knob 3 on bracket 5 and remove luggage holder 2 by pulling it out. ▌Installing or removing the telescopic rod Installing The telescopic rod is used to secure loads against the rear seats to prevent them from moving around. # # # # # Insert one bracket 2 into both the left and right load rails and slide it to the desired position. Press and hold the release knob 3. Insert telescopic rod 1 into brackets 2 and slide it downwards until it engages. On both brackets, press locking button 4. To remove: press release knob 3 on respective bracket 2 and remove telescopic rod 1 by pulling it upwards and out. Attaching a roof luggage rack & WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. 124 Seats and stowing # Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is installed. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the tailgate can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is installed. # Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to nonapproved roof luggage racks The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is installed, open the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 110). Seats and stowing 125 R R # # Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 169). R R In the stowage compartment in the center console of the rear passenger compartment In the cargo compartment Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof railing. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Sockets Using the 12 V socket Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front center console Requirements R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). # Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the stowage compartment in the front center console # Briefly press the trim element of the cover on the front. The cover opens in the direction of the arrow. Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to a damaged connecting cable or a damaged socket You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage. # When the vehicle is switched off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. 126 Seats and stowing USB port in the rear passenger compartment & DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. When the vehicle is switched on, the devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A). In particular, you could receive an electric shock: R If you touch the inside of the socket R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket # # Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone Do not touch the inside of the socket. Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket. When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket flap closed. Requirements R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 150 W. R Do not use multiple socket outlets. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly # # Open socket flap 3. Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Seats and stowing 127 # # # # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone storage compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compartment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids R R R R If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the vehicle is switched on. It may not be possible to charge small mobile phones in every part of the mobile phone stowage compartment. It may not be possible to charge large mobile phones that do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment or connect them to the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This depends on the applications (apps) currently running. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone stowage compartment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone stowage compartment is highest when the controller in the glove compartment is closed. To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile 128 Seats and stowing R phone. Protective covers that are designed for wireless charging are excluded. When charging, the mat should be used if possible. Charging a mobile phone wirelessly Requirements R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com. Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown on the central display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. # # # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. Installing and removing the floor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # # To install: press studs 1 onto holders 2. To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2. Light and visibility 129 Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch ▌Operating the light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off. When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the side lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. 1 2 3 4 W Left-hand parking lights X Right-hand parking lights T Side lamps and license plate lighting à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) If the battery is insufficiently charged, the side lamps or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. 130 Light and visibility The exterior lighting (except side lamps and parking lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 137). ▌Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the side lamps, low beam and daytime running lamps will be switched on automatically depending on the ambient light. ▌Switching the rear fog light on/off Operating the combination switch for the lights Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à position. # Press button R . Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right High-beam flasher Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to select the desired function. Light and visibility 131 Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K. Switching off high beam Move the combination switch back to its starting position. # # To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if: R the air bag has been deployed. # 132 Light and visibility Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED ▌Intelligent Light System function (Canada) The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 132) R Cornering light (/ page 132) R Highway mode (/ page 133) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 133) R Bad weather light (/ page 133) R City lighting (/ page 133) The system is active only when it is dark. ▌Active headlamps function R R The headlamps follow the steering movements. Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance. ▌Cornering light function The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on. The function will be active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned Light and visibility 133 Traffic circle and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle or intersection. ▌Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. The function will be active if a highway journey is detected by means of: R the vehicle's speed R the multifunction camera R the navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: R at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) ▌Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces self-glare and improves the illumination of the edge of the road. The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the rear fog light is switched on. The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph (100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched off. ▌Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are dazzled less as a result. ▌The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas ▌Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off (Canada) Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. 134 Light and visibility Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Intelligent Light System # Activate or deactivate the function. Adaptive Highbeam Assist ▌Adaptive Highbeam Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. R Light and visibility 135 The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. ▌Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up in the central display section of the instrument display. Switching off Switch off high beam using the combination switch. # Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ▌Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada) & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. 136 Light and visibility ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated with reduced brightness. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting: R Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically. at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h): The ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically. R At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h): If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not raining heavily, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically. R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off automatically. R % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. ▌Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada) Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on high beam using the combination switch. When high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light Light and visibility 137 up in the central display section of the instrument display. Switching off Switch off high beam using the combination switch. # Switching the daytime running lamps on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Activate or deactivate the function. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Front overhead control panel Switching the surround lighting on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function. 1 2 3 4 5 p Front left reading lamp S Automatic interior lighting control c Front interior lighting u Rear interior lighting p Front right reading lamp # To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5 accordingly. 138 Light and visibility Control panel in the grab handle Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate or deactivate the function. or # Set the brightness for the desired zones. 1 p Rear passenger compartment reading lamp # To switch on or off: press the 1 button. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort Setting the color Select Color. # Set the desired color. # 5 Ambient Lighting Activating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination. Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation. The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals. Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run. Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. When this function is active, the interior lighting lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked. Light and visibility 139 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wiper on/off 1 2 3 4 5 g Windshield wiper off Ä Intermittent wiping, normal Å Intermittent wiping, frequent ° Continuous wiping, slow ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wipes with washer fluid % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 305). # Switching the rear window wiper on/off 1 2 3 4 ô Wipes with washer fluid ° Switches on intermittent wipe g Switches off intermittent wipe ô Wipes with washer fluid 140 Light and visibility # Turn switch 1 è to the correct position 1 - 4. The è symbol will appear on the instrument display when the rear window wiper is switched on. Replacing the windshield wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 139). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position. Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield. # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. Light and visibility 141 Installing the wiper blades Switch on the vehicle. Press the î button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions. # Switch off the vehicle. % Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing. # Maintenance display # # # # # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the windshield. # Remove protective film 1 from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly installed wiper blades. When the color of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades. 142 Light and visibility % The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions. Removing the wiper blade Installing the wiper blades Replacing the rear window wiper blade & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. # # # Switch off the vehicle. Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear window until it engages in the replacement position. Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction of arrow 3. # # # Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper arm. Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder 2. Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly. Light and visibility 143 # Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window. Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror Folding the outside mirrors in/out The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoulder to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you. # Briefly press button 1. Readjusting the outside mirrors % If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the outside mirrors must be readjusted. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # Briefly press button 1. 144 Light and visibility Adjusts the outside mirrors # Press button 3 or 4 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted. # Press button 2 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. Engaging the outside mirrors Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be moved to the correct position. # Automatic anti-glare mirrors function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into antiglare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The vehicle is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 145). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged. Light and visibility 145 The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another transmission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing Calling up Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position. # Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Automatic Folding. # # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. 146 Light and visibility Area on the windshield permeable to radio waves Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only in areas 1 of the windshield permeable to radio waves. The area permeable to radio waves 1 is best visible from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an additional light source. Infrared-reflective windshield function The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. Climate control 147 6 Vehicles with control panel for automatic cli- Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control An interior air filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Overview of the air-conditioning control panel The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. Control panel for automatic climate control with/ without stationary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature, left 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control 4 à Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 149) 5 ¬ Defrosts the windshield mate control (without stationary heater): t calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with control panel for automatic climate control (with stationary heater, plug-in hybrid) or control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control (with/without stationary heater, plug-in hybrid): ! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches residual heat on/off (/ page 150) 7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off 8 Vehicles with control panel for automatic climate control without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronization on/off (/ page 149) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control without stationary heater: ¿ switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 148) Vehicles with a stationary heater: & switches the stationary heater on/off Plug-in hybrid: & activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control" 148 Climate control 9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 150) A Vehicles with control panel for automatic climate control: ¿ switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 148) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control: _ sets the air distribution, right B w Sets the temperature, right Rear operating unit in vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly. Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿ button. 1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the airflow Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off # # To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button. To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H button. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction. Calling up the air conditioning menu Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display. Climate control 149 Calling up the air-conditioning menu using the button on the climate control panel # Press the ! button on the climate control panel. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Select A/C. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press button à . # To switch to manual mode: press the H or _ button. Climate style Setting the air distribution ▌Climate style function The following climate styles are available in automatic mode: R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-free setting Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 148). # Select a row of seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the airflow. % Several air distributions can be selected at the same time, e.g. to air-condition both the windshield and the footwell. The ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row. ▌Setting the climate style # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 148). # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats. # Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. # Select a climate style. Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the air conditioning control panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be 150 Climate control adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the 0 button. The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate control zones are changed. Switching the synchronization function on/off via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Select SYNC and switch on or off. Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows remain fogged up: press the ¬ button. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the à button. the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. # To switch on: press the ! button. Residual heat is switched off automatically. Activating/deactivating ionization Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odorless. # Select IONIZATION and activate or deactivate the function. Fragrance system Switching the residual heat on or off ▌Setting the fragrance system Requirements: R The vehicle is parked. Requirements R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating Climate control 151 Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box. # Select AIR FRESHENER. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. # # + If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons ▌Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. # Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. To remove: pull out the flacon. If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. 152 Climate control Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml). # Screw the cap back onto the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet enclosed with the flacon. # # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, note the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (/ page 305). # # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go. To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. ▌Adjusting the rear air vents Air vents ▌Adjusting the front air vents & WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents # Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go. To set the airflow direction: hold the center of air vent 1 and move it up or down or to the left or right. Climate control 153 ▌Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box * NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. # At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the right or left. 154 Driving and parking Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG RIDE CONTROL + R AMG steering-wheel buttons Switching on the power supply or the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle Requirements R The key is in the vehicle and is recognized. R The brake pedal is not depressed. If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. # To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, switch on the windshield wipers. Driving and parking 155 The power supply will be switched off again if the following conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more. To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the instrument cluster. The vehicle will be switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once. # Starting the vehicle ▌Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements R The key is in the vehicle and is recognized. Shift the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle does not start: switch off nonessential consumer equipment and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears on the instrument display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 156). % You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button 1 for about three seconds or press button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (/ page 159). Observe any information regarding display messages that may be displayed on the instrument display. # # 156 Driving and parking ▌Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears on the instrument display, you can start the vehicle in emergency mode. # # # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. Remove key 1 from the key ring. Place key 1 in stowage compartment 2. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key 1 from marked space 2, the vehicle can still be driven. For further engine starts, however, key 1 must be loca- # ted in marked space 2 during the entire journey. Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start: # Place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. % You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the instrument display. Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services ▌Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R R R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. The fuel tank is sufficiently full. The starter battery is sufficiently charged. ▌Charging the starter battery before starting the journey You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. Driving and parking 157 ▌Starting the vehicle (Remote Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can switch off the vehicle at any time as follows: R Via the Smartphone App R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the key % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Breaking-in notes To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R No faster than 85 mph (140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive mode A or ;. R Shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shift down manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km). This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. 158 Driving and parking Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached when this teaching-in process has concluded. R Brake pads, brake disks and tires that are either new or have been replaced achieve optimum braking effect and grip only after several hundred kilometers. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimized acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 189). Pulling away with optimized acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use optimized acceleration, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skidding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. Requirements: R the vehicle has been broken in (/ page 157). R the vehicle and tires are in good condition. R you are on a high-grip roadway. R the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. * NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration When pulling away with optimized acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration. # # # # # # Engage the h drive position (/ page 174). Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 170). Deactivate ESP® (/ page 191). Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal. Driving and parking 159 # # After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete. Ending optimized acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate ESP®. % After you pull away with optimized acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes. # Notes on driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers There is a risk of an accident. Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. # & WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the vehicle while driving. & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. 160 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect. & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running. # Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alcohol and drugs while driving Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the overrevving range. * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. # Do not depress the brake pedal continuously whilst driving. To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. Driving and parking 161 * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. % Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance. Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and trailer load. Also observe the information in the Technical Data. R Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 110). R Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. 162 Driving and parking Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance may increase considerably or result in one-sided braking. R Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle in front. Remove salt build-up as follows: R Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface. Observe the following notes in the event of heavy precipitation or conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R R R Avoid tire ruts Avoid sudden steering movements Brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 332). Notes on fording on the road Water ingress in the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter through the engine's air intake and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you have to drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may cause the maximum permissible depth of water to be exceeded. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the traffic conditions, until braking power has been fully restored. Notes on off-road driving & WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. # Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by flammable material on hot exhaust system components Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. Driving and parking 163 # # # When driving on an unpaved road or offroad, check the vehicle underside regularly. In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material. If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. When driving off-road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil, etc., may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteristics. * NOTE Damage caused by driving over obstacles The vehicle can be damaged by: R Driving onto high curbs or unpaved roads. R Quickly driving over obstacles such as curbs, speed bumps or potholes. R Heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components. # # # # Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle. Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving. Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions. If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to non-observance of prohibition signs Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect. # Be sure to observe prohibition signs. % The vehicle is designed for easily negotiable and moderate off-road terrain. When driving off-road, make sure there is sufficient ground clearance. Checklist before driving off-road Check the following points before driving off-road: R Fuel level R Engine oil level: fill engine oil to the maximum level to ensure full gradeability (/ page 301) R Tire-change tool kit and spare wheel R Tires and wheels % Further information about special all-terrain tires for retrofitting can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. 164 Driving and parking Off-road driving Read this section before driving your vehicle offroad. Practice by driving over more gentle off-road terrain first. R Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS (/ page 189). R If necessary, select the F or G (/ page 170) driving mode before driving offroad. R Select a vehicle level suitable for off-road terrain (/ page 224). To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. R R R R Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain. Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on marked routes. Always keep the doors and windows closed while the vehicle is in motion. Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and cruise control. R R Adapt your driving style to the terrain. Do not use the HOLD function on steep downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces. Driving on sand When driving on sand, also observe the following instructions: R Select the F driving mode. R Select a higher vehicle level. R Shift to a lower gear. R Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance; the vehicle may otherwise dig itself in. R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that the following prerequisites are met: the tire ruts are not too deep the sand is firm enough the ground clearance is sufficient Fording Also observe the following information when fording: R Drive no faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Switch off automatic climate control (/ page 149). R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive. R Do not stop in the water and do not switch off the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stop function is switched off (/ page 166). Driving in mountainous terrain Also observe the following information when driving in mountainous terrain: R Avoid high engine speeds. R Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill. R Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and on long, steep downhill gradients. R Activate DSR before driving downhill, if necessary (/ page 204). Driving and parking 165 Checklist after driving off-road Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalances and therefore vibrations. R If the F or G driving mode is selected: select another driving mode. R Deactivate DSR. R Lower the vehicle level again to a level suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal level. R Apply the brakes to dry them after fording. R Check that the service brake is working normally after a long downhill stretch. R Clean the following components every time after driving off-road: license plate number headlamps and tail lamps tires, wheels and wheel arches underbody R After driving through sand, mud, water or gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned: brake disks and brakepads tires and wheels axle joints ECO start/stop function ▌ECO start/stop function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the instrument display concerning this. The engine will be switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine will restart automatically in the following cases: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R The vehicle requires an automatic engine start. R You release the brake pedal. 166 Driving and parking R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). ECO start/stop function symbols on the instrument display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the è symbol nor the ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been detected. R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In addition, the following display message will appear on the instrument display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after three minutes. ▌Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function Press button 1. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated. % Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console. # Driving and parking 167 ECO display function R The ECO display summarizes your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the following: R Driving with particular care. R Following the gearshift recommendations. R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling 3 Moderate acceleration The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system) ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 245). The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at the same time R The edges around all three segments will light up The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Steady speed The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the center of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption. 1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot off the accelerator" prompt 168 Driving and parking Displayable route events 1 The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away. When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the Accelerator3 message appears in the Instrument Display. The first segments in front of the vehicle will turn green. The remaining segments will initially stay white. If you take your foot off the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recuperation will charge the battery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selected drive program. The event will be shown for a short time after it has been passed. If there is no response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white. If the event involves a vehicle in front, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt. For active ECO Assist in drive program ;, symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside transmission position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A. System limits ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times, irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. Driving and parking 169 R R R R If there is dirt on the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears on the instrument display. = Individual R Individual settings B Sport+ R Particularly sporty driving R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteer and understeer characteristics for an even more active driving style R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road C Sport Continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup R Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road R A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions ; Eco Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions R F Offroad Intervenes later if there is oversteer or understeer, thus improving traction R Suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain, such as dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces R Not suitable for use on public roads R G Offroad+ Intervenes later if there is oversteer or understeer, thus improving traction R Suitable for difficult terrain, such as steep and/or uneven terrain or for driving on rocky terrain R Not suitable for use on public roads R 170 Driving and parking % The ESP® settings in the drive programs ; and A are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. Depending on the drive program, the following systems will change their characteristics: R Drive Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension R Electric power steering Selecting the drive program Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category. Switching the reset display on or off # Switch Request at Start on or off. # Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected will appear on the instrument display. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set automatically. The Driving and parking 171 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or countryspecific guidelines). Influencing variables that can influence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine % The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the media display may deviate from the actual values. Displaying engine data Calling up the fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. ECO start/stop function is activated automatically. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Displaying vehicle data Displaying the Offroad Score Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info Use the Offroad Score only for off-road driving and not on public roads. When choosing the route, take into account the vehicle characteristics, the ground conditions and your driving skills. Do not let the system distract you from what is happening on the route. # Select Offroad Score. A menu appears. You can start a new trip. Further functions are available in the lower menu bar: R Display the current trip via the route symbol. R Display a list of all notes for the current trip using the list icon. In the list, a note is displayed with a time stamp, the number of points currently achieved and the note text. R Display the ranking by clicking on the symbol for the winner's podium. 172 Driving and parking The ranking list shows the following information: Profile name and profile picture (if available) The number of points obtained Date and time of the completed trip The places for gold, silver and bronze Starting or ending a new trip The "Start new trip" function is available when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. # Select Start new trip. The display "Trip and tips" appears. The following information is displayed: R the vehicle inclination in longitudinal direction in percent (%) R the lateral inclination of the vehicle in degrees (°) R the currently achieved score for the ongoing trip R a tip for the upcoming driving maneuver # To stop the display: select End trip. An evaluation of the trip is displayed. It shows the achieved score and a message, for example Great job!. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ▌Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. Driving and parking 173 Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the instrument display. ▌Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. ▌Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. % To shift into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive position Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the car is stationary. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch off the vehicle. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i. ▌Engaging park position P * NOTE Damage due to engaging park position j while the vehicle is rolling If you shift the transmission into park position j while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged. # If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door. # Only engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary. # # # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 178). Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If the trans- 174 Driving and parking mission position display j does not appear, apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j will be engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position h or k. R When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position h or k and bring it to a standstill. R When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position i, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary. R Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle. % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position h or k again. ▌Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmission position h, it will shift gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed Manual gearshifting * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel paddle shifter. If permitted, the automatic transmission will shift to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel paddle shifter being pulled. You have two options for manually shifting the automatic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting The gears will shift automatically when manual shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting: Driving and parking 175 # To activate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1 or 2. Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission position display will show p and the current gear. % How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various factors. Manual shifting can be deactivated automatically in the following cases: R When the drive program is changed R When the vehicle is restarted R When transmission position h is engaged again R Driving style # To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter 2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1. # To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel paddle shifter 2. The transmission position display will show h. Permanent setting: # Change to drive program =(/ page 170). # Select drive setting p (/ page 170). Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance. To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. Glide mode function * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # # If gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear. Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterised by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. 176 Driving and parking R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: The combustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R R R R Height Speed Operating status of the engine Traffic situation Function of 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. Refueling Refueling the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater, and leave them switched off during refueling. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. Driving and parking 177 # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. 178 Driving and parking # * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks # # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. # * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2. Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. Close fuel filler flap 1. Requirements R The vehicle is unlocked. # Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane rating specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output may be reduced and fuel consumption increased. Parking Parking the vehicle 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fuel filler flap Bracket for fuel filler cap Tire pressure table QR code for rescue card Notes on auxiliary heater Fuel type # Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap 1. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. Driving and parking 179 # # # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the parking brake. Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away. * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body. 180 Driving and parking Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed (/ page 173). # Switch off the vehicle by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. # # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal. On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. Garage door opener ▌Programming buttons for the garage door opener & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. Driving and parking 181 # # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and backing up feature R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. Requirements The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. R % The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on. # Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. # Point remote control 6 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 5 of remote control 6 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. 182 Driving and parking % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. ▌Synchronizing the rolling code Requirements R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. Press the program button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # ▌Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 6 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 6. # Hold remote control 6 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 6 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 5 on remote control 6 again before transmission ends. # Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. % It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even after you have successfully performed the measures described above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline. % Support and additional information on programming: R on the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R on the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes ▌Opening or closing a garage door Requirements R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press the previously pressed button again and hold it down until the door opens or closes. Driving and parking 183 ▌Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # Electric parking brake ▌Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically) & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The vehicle is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 184). In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: The vehicle is switched off. The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. The power supply is insufficient. The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the Instrument Display. 184 Driving and parking % The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. ▌Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: You shift from transmission position j. or - You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the Instrument Display goes out. ▌Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the Instrument Display. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp is lit continuously. # Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the Instrument Display goes out. ▌Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the Instrument Display. Driving and parking 185 Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is switched on and collision detection is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system when the vehicle is switched on. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situation may lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved in a two-story garage, for example. % Deactivate tow-away protection to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate towaway protection, collision detection will also be deactivated. % If the battery is heavily discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehi- cle will automatically be deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. System limits Detection may be restricted in the following situations: R the vehicle is damaged without impact, such as if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R impact occurs at low speed R the electric parking brake is not applied % You are responsible for your vehicle. Make sure that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy. Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use) ▌Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-operation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrupted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not available. R The interior protection and tow-away alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available. 186 Driving and parking If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby Mode message appears in the media display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. ▌Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle) Requirements R The vehicle is switched off. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems that assist you in driving, parking and maneuvering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. % Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers. Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. Driving and parking 187 & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Multifunction camera Cameras in the outside mirrors Front radar Front camera Corner radars Ultrasonic sensors Rear view camera Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 308). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grill, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. % The rear view camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R R R R R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 188) BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 189) ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 189) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 190) EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 191) 188 Driving and parking R R R R R R R STEER CONTROL (/ page 191) HOLD function (/ page 191) Hill Start Assist (/ page 192) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 193) Cruise control (/ page 194) Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 214) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 223) Driving Assistance Package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 196) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 201) R Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 202) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 210) R R R R R R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 205) Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 208) Active Lane Change Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 208) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 203) Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 218) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 221) Parking Package Rear view camera (/ page 226) R 360° Camera (/ page 228) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 231) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 235) R Functions of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started. R Driving and parking 189 Functions of Off-road ABS % Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select the F or G drive program. Off-road ABS is specially adapted for driving offroad: R The front wheels lock cyclically during braking. R The braking distance is shortened due to the digging-in effect. System limits R Off-road ABS functions at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h). R If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer may be restricted. Function of BAS & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP® & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. 190 Driving and parking When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking. When the ÷ warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 429) R Display messages (/ page 375) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. All-terrain vehicles: if you select drive program F or G, a special ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is automatically activated. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 170). Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individual brake application on one side. Driving and parking 191 Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # # # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Select ESP. Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Function of EBD R Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is characterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. R Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the following situations: R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. ESP® is malfunctioning. The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. HOLD function ▌HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. 192 Driving and parking ▌Activating/deactivating the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it. Requirements R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. R R R The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the Instrument Display. # Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display disappears from the Instrument Display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R The transmission is shifted to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when you pull away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. Driving and parking 193 & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. ATTENTION ASSIST ▌Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. R If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: the fuller the circle, the higher the attention level determined as your attention wanes, the circle in the center of the display becomes smaller If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. After the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. 194 Driving and parking System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 205). R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations. The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the vehicle. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break). ▌Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting rest areas # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or an increasing lack of attention, it will suggest a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You will be guided to the selected rest area. Speed control cruise control ▌Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, forexample, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). Displays in the Instrument Display R h (gray): cruise control is selected but not yet activated. R h (green): cruise control is active. Driving and parking 195 A stored speed appears along with the h display. % The segments between the stored speed and the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer. System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situations: R in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads R R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. when visibility is poor ▌Operating cruise control & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Requirements R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph (20 km/h). R The transmission is in position h. Steering wheel control panel for cruise control J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates cruise control M Activates cruise control N Deactivates cruise control 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed Activating cruise control # Press M. 196 Driving and parking Activating cruise control # Press M or N on control panel 1. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. or # Press J. The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Briefly press M or N on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the following values depending on the unit: R mph: the next value ending in 5 R km/h: the next value ending in 0 or Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press M on control panel 1. Adopting a detected speed If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster: # Press J. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed. # # Deactivating cruise control # Press ±. Deactivating cruise control # Press N. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ▌Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h) Driving and parking 197 Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent) Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays on the instrument display Assistant display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route event (/ page 202) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis- play Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R k (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and no vehicle detected R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 202). The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. 198 Driving and parking % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The ç Suspended message will appear on the instrument display. Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The instrument display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations,for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, direct sunlight or greatly varying ambient light, or if there is glare. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R R R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. # Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. # & WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. Driving and parking 199 & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. ▌Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R R R R R The transmission is in position h. All the doors are closed. Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. DSR is deactivated. Drive program G is deactivated. J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed K Increases/decreases the specified distance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 200 Driving and parking # To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel. Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press H. Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: on control panel 1 press M on the upper section or N on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or # To activate with a stored speed: press J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle. If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. Increasing or reducing the speed To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To reduce the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Briefly press M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on the upper section of control panel 1. # Adopting the limit speed shown on the instrument cluster # To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press M, N or J. # To accept the displayed speed limit: press J. The limit speed displayed on the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. % A speed limit shown on the driver's display is only adopted while driving, not when stationary. Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Driving and parking 201 Reducing or increasing the specified distance from the vehicle in front # Press K. The h display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. # Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. ▌Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 215). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display on the instrument display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 214). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. applicable for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. 202 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer # # Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. ▌Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 203). The following route events are taken into account: R Bends R T-intersections, traffic circles and toll stations R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic Information ) % When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, traffic circles and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. Driving and parking 203 The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations: R road's course not clearly visible R road narrowing R varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, forexample at toll stations R wet road surfaces, snow or ice In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations: R If the driver does not follow the calculated route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation. R ▌Setting route-based speed adaptation Requirements R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R ECO Assist is active. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on route-based speed adaptation (/ page 202). ▌Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The ¬ status display appears in the instrument cluster when the function is active. Requirements: R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or highspeed major road. 204 Driving and parking R R R R R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 199). Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 210). Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 207). Active Traffic Jam Assist is activated (/ page 204). You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Traffic Jam Assist. ▌Activating/deactivating Active Traffic Jam Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select ¬. DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) ▌Function of DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the D S R braking effect on the vehicle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradients, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. When DSR is activated and the transmission is in position h, k or i, DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 1 mph (2 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h). By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. If you drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h) or change the driving program (except in F/ G), DSR switches off automatically. The î Off message then appears in the multifunction display. The status indicator in the multifunction display disappears. You also hear a warning tone. ▌Notes on DSR & WARNING Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces If the driven speed and the target speed differ, the wheels may lose traction. # Take into account the road surface and the difference between the driving speed and target speed before activating DSR. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tires, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required. Driving and parking 205 ▌Activating or deactivating DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) ▌Changing the target speed Requirements: R You are driving at a speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or lower. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Max. Speed 24 mph message appears in the multifunction display. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select î. A status display appears in the multifunction display when the function is activated. % When you switch to the F drive program, the function is automatically activated. # # Press and hold1 at M the top of the control panel. The target speed is increased in 1-mph ( 1-km/h) increments. To decrease the target speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The target speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or Press and hold1 atN the bottom of the control panel. The target speed is 1-mph ( reduced in 1-km/h) increments. The selected target speed appears along with the î status display in the multifunction display. # # or To increase the target speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The target speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). Active Steering Assist ▌Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. 206 Driving and parking % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance by driving outside the center of the lane, for example, to form an emergency corridor. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. % Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Status display of Active Steering Assist R Ø (gray): activated and passive R Ø (green): activated and active R Ø (red): system limits detected R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. When the passive state is reached, the Ø symbol is displayed in gray. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 208). The warning does not occur or stops as soon as the system detects that the driver is touching or steering the steering wheel. Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in the following situations: R The driver is wearing gloves. R There is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer- Driving and parking 207 ing intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, suchas object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight bends and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At traffic circles or toll stations. R When the tire pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions. ▌Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select a Steering Assist. 208 Driving and parking Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears on the instrument display. If the driver still does not actively steer the vehicle, or provides no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds repeatedly in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears on the instrument display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the vehicle's speed. The vehicle is slowed down to a standstill in stages. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning light system switches on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Lane Change Assist ▌Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver activates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a broken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active. If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins Driving and parking 209 after the driver has activated the turn signal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. The message Lane Change to the Left, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the ± steering wheel symbol, which remains green. As soon as the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated. If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the Lane Change Canceled message appears on the instrument display. In addition, a warning tone may sound, depending on the situation. & WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guarantee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system limits of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 205). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty, damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a defect. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol Ø when the turn signal indicator is activated. ▌Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Select the function. 210 Driving and parking Active Brake Assist ▌Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display and then automatically goes out after a short time. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the ê display message appears in the driver's display. Driving and parking 211 If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a malfunction, or if the functions are restricted, the Ó warning lamp appears in the driver's display. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching crossing pedestrians Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R R R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph (200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles or moving pedestrians 212 Driving and parking Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles and cyclists ahead at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedestrians Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver. Driving and parking 213 R R R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approximately 43 mph (70 km/h). You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. # Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. System limits Full system performance is not yet available for a short time after switching on the vehicle or after driving off. As long as the functions are restricted, the Æ warning lamp can also be shown in the driver's display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available. The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. 214 Driving and parking R On bends with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process. ▌Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Requirements R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off. The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. The system is switched on again the next time the vehicle is started. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the Instrument Display. Traffic Sign Assist ▌Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 186). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions on the instrument display. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric- tion applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies. Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Driving and parking 215 Display on the instrument display If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears on the instrument display: R R R Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction % Vehicles with a standard instrument display: a + symbol next to a traffic sign on the instrument display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed on the media display and optionally on the head-up display. This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display messages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 375). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R R If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision. ▌Setting Traffic Sign Assist Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits. 216 Driving and parking Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Traffic Sign Assist 5 Assistance Activating or deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Switch the function on or off. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 199). Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display. # Switch the function on or off. Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off. Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed. # # Keep the actual traffic situation constantly in view when approaching a traffic light and when changing lanes. Avoid looking at the Instrument Display and Head-up Display for a long time. The Instrument Display and Head-up Display (if available) show the traffic light icon and remaining time until the next green phase as a countdown. Traffic Light Information service & WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. Example representation in the Instrument Display 1 Traffic light icon and countdown of remaining time until the next green phase time Driving and parking 217 The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green. % The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning off before the intersection into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection % The direction arrows are displayed depending on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active route guidance If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed. % Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to MercedesBenz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwarded to the provider of the traffic light information service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not permanently saved. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R You deactivate the service in the Assistance menu in the multimedia system (/ page 218). % This traffic light information service is only available in certain cities and regions. The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communication module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The traffic light data service belongs to the scope of the navigation services. The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traffic light data service provider. The provider gathers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal left or right and lane recommendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, systems or components. Please note that the displayed data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situa- 218 Driving and parking tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The information in the Instrument Display is shown after selecting the display contents in the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regulations Please observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. System limits The display does not appear in the following situations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase is less than ten seconds. R R R R R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. The data transmission from the vehicle has been interrupted. The traffic light systems are located in a construction site area or are undergoing maintenance. The light signal system is malfunctioning. The subscription to the service has expired. Switching the traffic light information display on or off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Switch Traffic Light Information on D or off E. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ▌Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument cluster: R ¸ (gray): system is activated but inoperative R ¸ (green): system is activated and operational If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside Driving and parking 219 mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following: R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area R if vehicles traveling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 186). Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance. If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the vehicle off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants. System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes 220 Driving and parking R R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects ▌Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dangers (/ page 218). Driving and parking 221 Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. ▌Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist. Active Lane Keeping Assist ▌Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a multifunction camera (/ page 186). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided back into your lane by a coursecorrecting brake application. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer: R à (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating. R R à (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating. ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display 1 will appear on the instrument display. The system does not apply the brake on the corresponding side if you activate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. 222 Driving and parking You will be warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking. Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time by steering slightly in the opposite direction. Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time by steering slightly in the opposite direction. System limits No lane-correcting brake application will occur in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected and displayed. If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings were not clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application will take place (/ page 223). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R If there are no lane markings or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty Driving and parking 223 or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place. ▌Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. ▌Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating or deactivating the haptic warning Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function. # AIR BODY CONTROL ▌AIR BODY CONTROL function R R * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following components and functions: R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R Manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program Drive program A: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of approximately 78 mph (125 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. Drive program ;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds. 224 Driving and parking Drive program C: The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds. R Drive program B: The suspension setting is even firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds. R Drive program F: R The suspension setting is suitable for off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of 78 mph (125 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. Drive program G: The suspension setting is suitable for off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to high level +1. R When driving at speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered to the normal level. R When driving at speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. R Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program = (/ page 170). ▌Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. Driving and parking 225 # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. R All-Terrain vehicles: the vehicle must not be moving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). Raising the vehicle * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Requirements R The vehicle has been started. R All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: the vehicle must not be moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). % In the G drive program, the vehicle cannot be raised further by using button 1. The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the following situations: R All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: when driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: when driving between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R All-Terrain vehicles: when driving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). R After changing a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program. # Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level. Your selection is saved. Lowering the vehicle # Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. 226 Driving and parking Rear view camera ▌Function of the rear view camera The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects, etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Normal view 1 Driven surface depending on the current 2 3 4 5 steering angle (dynamic) Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area Lane marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Bumper Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area Wide-angle view Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Driving and parking 227 5 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area Normal view 1 Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis- tance between approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) 2 Orange warning display: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) 3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) The color of warning display 1/2 changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 3.3 ft (1.0 m) detected. R Yellow: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Orange: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less % Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 4 are displayed in green. Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC System malfunction If the rear view camera is not operational, the System Inoperative message appears in the media display. System limits The rear view camera will not function or will function only partially in the following situations: R The tailgate is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. 228 Driving and parking R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 186). % Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360° camera ▌Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras that cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, forexample. The views of the 360° Camera are always available when the vehicle is being driven forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when it is being backed up. The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360° Camera 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam- era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) Function of the guide lines Guide lines are also displayed in the camera images of the top views. These are based on the Driving and parking 229 current steering angle and show the distance to objects and other vehicles. 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Yellow lanes marking the course that the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area % When Active Parking Assist is active, paths 2 are displayed in green. The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is also shown (/ page 231). The color of warning display changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Yellow: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Orange: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less % When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the warning display is shown here in blue. Wide-angle view, front 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 230 Driving and parking Top view with image from the front camera R R R 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 231) 2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route that the vehicle will take at the current steering angle Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears in the media display. The 360° Camera will not function or will function only partially in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged up. If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. % Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). Driving and parking 231 % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when you are driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 308). ▌Calling up the view of the 360° Camera using reverse gear # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 228). # If the image from the rear view camera is not shown after reverse gear is engaged: switch off the vehicle, press and hold the c button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ▌Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/ exiting parking spaces. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking procedure or maneuvering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown. Displays on the media display Vehicles with 360° camera 232 Driving and parking R R Vehicles without 360° camera As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Obstacles detected at the front left and on the right-hand side The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.3 ft (0.7 m) Orange: approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft (0.4 m) Red: <1.2 ft (0.4 m) Vehicles with 360° camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system(/ page 235). Standard setting: R Front and sides: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m) R Rear: < 3.3 ft (1 m) Vehicles with 360° camera Warn Early All Around: R Front: < 3.3 ft (1 m) R Sides: < 2.3 ft (0.7 m) R Rear: < 3.3 ft (1 m) A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m), regardless of the selected setting. Vehicles without 360° camera Driving and parking 233 If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and the Camera & Parking menu is not open on the media display, pop-up window 1appears: R vehicles without Active Parking Assist: at speeds below 8 mph (12 km/h) R vehicles with Active Parking Assist: at speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side. R Objects placed next to the vehicle Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it off. R You open the doors. Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) on the side 3 can also be displayed on the head-up display. After an engine start, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a warning can be issued. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 186). Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 Vehicles with 360° camera 2 Vehicles without 360° camera If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds before going out, and the é symbol appears on the instrument cluster, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. 234 Driving and parking If the é symbol appears on the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 308). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▌Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Vehicles without AIR BODY CONTROL: press the é button in the center console. % Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 234). If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. # ▌Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Requirements R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Tap = on the media display. If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears on the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. Driving and parking 235 ▌Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function. Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value. Active Parking Assist Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value. Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced ▌Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and 360° camera. When you are driving forwards at up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following functions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road Vehicles with 360° camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (forexample at the roadside) Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the Ç display appears on the instrument display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears on the instrument display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown on the media display. Vehicles with rear view camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse. Vehicles with 360° camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (forwards or reverse) can also be selected as desired. 236 Driving and parking When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the following situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. R After activating Active Parking Assist, you press the c button again (/ page 237). System limits If the exterior lighting is faulty, Active Parking Assist may not function, depending on the defect. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 226) R 360° camera (/ page 228) Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. # Extreme weather conditions, suchas snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions suchas ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. Driving and parking 237 R R R R R R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%. When snow chains are fitted. Directly after a tire change or when spare tires are fitted. If the tire pressure is too low or too high. If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb. ▌Parking with Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, suchas: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. # Press button 1. Parking spaces detected by the system are shown in the media display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 2 into currently selected parking space 3 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle. # If necessary, select another parking space. # Vehicles with 360° Camera: if necessary, change the parking direction. # To start the parking procedure: confirm selected parking space 3. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are 238 Driving and parking responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, forexample, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. % During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image. On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be canceled. ▌Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. Driving and parking 239 Take control of the vehicle and complete the parking process. % The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. # # Select Exit Space 2. or # # If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: select direction of travel 3. If, forexample, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears on the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space and is brought to a standstill by Active Parking Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel). The Ø Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. ▌Pausing Active Parking Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample: # Depress the brake pedal. # Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the trunk or the hood. # Apply the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function. # To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal. % If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. ▌Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. 240 Driving and parking Maneuvering assistance ▌Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears on the media display. Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 241). % You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 234). & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. There may be a risk of collision in the following situations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are mixed up. R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R If you shift the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is stationary. R R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. If the maneuvering assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 231). ▌Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears on the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Driving and parking 241 % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 218). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parkingmenu: System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. ▌Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the media display . You can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 241). # # % If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects, etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the maneuvering brake function alone. Be ready to brake. System limits Observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 235) R 360° Camera (/ page 228) R Rear view camera (/ page 226) The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R on inclines ▌Activating/deactivating maneuvering assistance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off. 242 Driving and parking Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 324) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 325) Instrument display and on-board computer 243 Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer & WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from specific systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always safe to operate. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the traffic conditions. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. 244 Instrument display and on-board computer Overview of instrument display 1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 2 Index points 3 Outside temperature 4 Time 5 Area for additional values (example: tachome- ter): tachometer/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tachometer (overrevving range) is reached. 6 Coolant temperature display During normal operation, coolant temperature display 6 is permitted to rise to the red mark. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and CHARGE displays (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor) 7 Selected drive program Instrument display and on-board computer 245 8 Selected transmission position 9 Center display area of the instrument display 6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system To navigate: swipe To confirm: press a 7 G Back button, MBUX multimedia system 8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system £ Voice Control System 9 To adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting (example: standard display for a trip): assistance/telephone/navigation/trip/media/ radio/styles and displays/service/possible settings for head-up display A Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator Overview of buttons on the steering wheel Depending on the equipment, the layout and the design of the control elements on the steering wheel may differ. 1 Control panel for cruise control or Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 195) 2 G Back button, on-board computer 3 Touch Control, on-board computer To navigate: swipe To confirm: press a 4 ò Main menu, on-board computer 5 ò Home screen, MBUX multimedia system Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. 246 Instrument display and on-board computer R R R R The on-board computer is operated using the lefthand Touch Control and the left-hand back/home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when you reach the end of a list. % To operate Touch Control in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone R Navigation R Trip Radio Media Service Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: Designs % You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display. # To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed. % Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer. # To scroll on the menu bar: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. # To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selection or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control. # To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a function, # an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button. Operating the head-up display # To switch on the head-up display: swipe upwards on the menu bar on the left-hand Touch Control. # To switch to the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To set the display areas of the head-up display: swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control. Displaying full-screen menus You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation # On the corresponding menu, use the left-hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list. Instrument display and on-board computer 247 # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen. Overview of displays on the instrument display Displays on the instrument display: u Active Parking Assist activated (/ page 237) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 234) h Cruise control (/ page 194) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 196) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 214) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 205) ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 203) à Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 221) ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 208) õ Operational readiness of the 48 V on-board electrical system drive system è ECO start/stop function (/ page 165) ë HOLD function (/ page 191) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 134) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 135) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 214). For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 429). R R Information from the driving systems and driving safety systems Some warning messages Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content may be shown in the three areas of the head-up display (/ page 248). Display content Head-up Display Function of the head-up display * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The head-up display projects the following information into the driver's field of vision above the cockpit, for example: R Driving speed R Information from the navigation system 1 2 3 4 Navigation instructions Current speed Detected instructions and traffic signs Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control) 248 Instrument display and on-board computer System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surface R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses % In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the head-up display off and on again. R R R R R R # # # # Setting the head-up display using the on-board computer On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following head-up display settings or displays can be selected or shown: R Position Brightness Messages Assistance status Telephone Audio Voice Control System To select the settings menu: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. Settings menu 5 will be selected. To call up the Settings menu: press the lefthand Touch Control. To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. Setting messages, assistance status, telephone, audio and the Voice Control System # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To choose settings: press the left-hand Touch Control. Selecting what the head-up display shows (Example) 1 Switching the head-up display on/off 2 Left display area Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Instrument display and on-board computer 249 4 5 6 7 Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning Right display area Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area Index points Lower display area (example: left display area) You can hide display areas 2 to 4 that are not required. % In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated. # Swipe upwards on left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD. The Head-up Display is activated. 250 MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. Overview of the MBUX multimedia system If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may differ from the description and 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Switch panel with buttons for telephone, navi- gation, radio/media, vehicle functions/ system settings and favorites/themes 4 Touchpad 5 Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or off For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: • Turn: adjusts the volume • Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off • Press and hold: switches the multimedia system on/off 6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or off For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: ö button • Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG Performance exhaust system MBUX multimedia system 251 Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. % You can find further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on anti-theft protection can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 252 MBUX multimedia system Home screen overview 1 Depending on the display, calls up the first 2 3 4 5 6 three applications or the home screen Calls up the profile Calls up the global search SOS NOT READY (only when the MercedesBenz emergency call system is not available) Mercedes me connect active Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, 8 9 A B C network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time Calls up the Notifications Center Calls up an application using the symbol Application and current information Quick-access, e.g. enter home address Index points and selected display area D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVORITES MBUX multimedia system 253 % If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back end system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is countrydependent. If transmission of vehicle position 6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent. Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control 1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control =9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm) 3 G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call 5 To increase volume: swipe upwards To reduce volume: swipe down 8 To switch off the sound: press 6 £ Starts the Voice Control System ß Calls up favorites (press briefly) or adds favorites and themes (press and hold) % To operate Touch Control 2 in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. 254 MBUX multimedia system To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. # To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears. % For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. # Using the touchpad # # # To use handwriting recognition: write a character on the touchpad. To open or close the Notifications Center: swipe down or up with two fingers. To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. Calling up applications using buttons 1 2 3 4 G Returns to the previous display ~ Calls up the audio control menu © Calls up the home screen Touchpad # To select a menu option: swipe and press. 1 2 3 4 5 % button calls up the telephone z button calls up navigation | button calls up radio or media y button calls up vehicle functions ß button MBUX multimedia system 255 Press briefly: calls up favorites Press and hold: adds a favorite or creates a new theme # # Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. Call up the application (/ page 252). Functions of the Voice Control System & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system: R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. With the Voice Control System, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R R R R Address book Radio Media Vehicle functions Starting the Voice Control System # Press 1. 256 MBUX multimedia system or # Say "Hello Mercedes". Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant & WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses). R System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. R R R The camera is covered, dirty, fogged up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. Recognition can be impaired by reflective clothing, an adverse color of clothing or by accessories, for example. Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera. Keep the camera's field of vision clear. The camera is not operational. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. MBUX multimedia system 257 The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions: Interaction area Interaction Description In front of the media display or above the touchpad Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a control element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required. Above the center console Defined pose A favorite is called up with a defined pose. Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on or off. Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again. Switching the reading light and search light and on or off Requirements: R For the reading light: The function is available when it is dark. The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror. For the search light: The function is available when it is dark. - R - - The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat. The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle. 258 MBUX multimedia system Switching the reading light on and off # Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or the front passenger. Switching the search light on and off # # To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver. To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again. Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favorites For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If a person is in danger of becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by: # a) Tapping the warning message on the media display. or # b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an access preventer. MBUX multimedia system 259 If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favorites. For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favorites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favorites from categories or add them directly to an application. Configuring profiles, themes and suggestions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles Creating a new profile # Select W Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile. # Select Finish. Selecting profile options # Select Ä for a profile. The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favourites R Configuring suggestions Configuring suggestions # Select Ä for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Suggestions on or off. # To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula- 260 MBUX multimedia system ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function. Creating new themes # Select ©. # Select THEMES. # Select W Create Theme . The settings saved in the theme are shown. # Select Continue r . # Select Audio and Navigation store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continue r . # Select an entry screen. # Select Continue r . # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry field and confirm with a. # Select Save. In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements: R Display Styles Instrument lighting Display brightness Edge lighting Day/night design R Control elements: Keyboard language and handwriting recognition Sensitivity of the touchpad Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R Voice Control System R Sound Entertainment Navigation and traffic announcements Telephone Voice amplification to the rear Connectivity: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC Time & date Language Units for distance Software updates Data import/export PIN protection System reset - System settings Overview of the system settings menu - R R R R R R R R Information on important system updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update MBUX multimedia system 261 R Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system % If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically. The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time. Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is complete and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The vehicle is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The electric parking brake has been applied. If all requirements have been fulfilled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multimedia system with external hotspots: your vehicle does not have a permanently installed communication module. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 System Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi Select Wi-Fi. # Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. 262 MBUX multimedia system % The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. # Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot. Connecting using a QR code Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect using QR code. # Scan the displayed QR code with the device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established. # Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # # # Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Enter this security key on the multimedia system. Confirm the entry with ¡. Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry. Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. Select Continue in the multimedia system. Activating automatic connection Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection. # Connecting with a known Wi-Fi network # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again. Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. MBUX multimedia system 263 Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. # Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and confirm. # # Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. Connecting using a button Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue. # Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. Confirm the entry. Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface. # Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered. System language ▌Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. ▌Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language # Set the language. 264 MBUX multimedia system % If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select ‫ العربية‬as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic. Resetting the multimedia system (reset function) & WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones 5 Reset R R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection Individual user profiles % The guest profile is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings. % Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset. A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset. Navigation Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation. # Avoid extended observation of the camera image. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. MBUX multimedia system 265 # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers. Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation # Alternatively: press the z button. The map displays the current vehicle position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active. # To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically. 266 MBUX multimedia system Navigation overview Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti- nation entry options 2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance is active) 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off 4 Calls up the ON THE WAY menu • To show Route Overview • To select Alternative Routes • Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X) • To call up the TRAFFIC menu - To display Traffic Announcements - To show Area Alerts - To display Provider Information • To show Route List • To call up the POSITION menu - Save Position - To display Compass 5 Quick-access and settings • To show Traffic • To show Parking MBUX multimedia system 267 • To show Highway Information • Via Advanced options to use View, Announcements and Route 1 Federal state or province in which the vehicle is located 2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry Entering a destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 6 7 8 9 5 ª Where to? a Confirms an entry Switches to handwriting recognition Enters a space Switches to voice input Sets the written language A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can be made in any order. 268 MBUX multimedia system The following entries can be made, for example: City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name R Select a search result in list 3. Calculate the route (/ page 268). % You can find further information about destination entry, e.g. three-word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual. # # Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or province 1. # Select the federal state or the province in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list 3. # Select the federal state or the province from list 3. Using online search % Requirements: the media display shows an Internet connection in the status line with the Q symbol. Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Enter the destination in input line 2. The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. # Enter the destination in input line 2. # Select the destination in the list. Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance Requirements R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped. MBUX multimedia system 269 # Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins. # # or # # Select ¦. Select Set as Waypoint. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. # Select Start New Route Guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneuver and will show additional information. # To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again. or # Selecting route settings Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration with Dynamic Route Guidance r. # Select route options with Avoid Options. Activate Suggest Alternative Route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output. Displaying additional information in the camera image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image. Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the media display. Moving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: press \ briefly. 270 MBUX multimedia system Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up. Switching freeway information on/off Select Z. # Activate or deactivate Highway Information. # Using services Requirements R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R R The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following additional conditions apply to the Parking service: The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traffic Information # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Activate Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing Traffic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic Incidents options. # Set the options. If Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route. Displaying weather information and other map contents # Select Z. # Select Advanced. MBUX multimedia system 271 # # # # Select View. Select Map Elements. Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENT category. Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. Parking service * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers. Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area. # Always observe the local information and conditions. % This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the parking garage/parking lot, e.g. Opening times Parking charges Current occupancy Maximum parking time Maximum access height The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at parking meters) R Services/facilities at the parking option 272 MBUX multimedia system Telephone number Calculate the route (/ page 268). R # Notes on the dashcam * NOTE Risk of legal consequences following violation of legal regulations and data protection requirements You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use. # Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements. Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition. Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system . R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 272). # Select the Individual Recording or Loop Recording recording mode. If Individual Recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops. If Loop Recording has been selected, several short video files are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video file is deleted and recording is continued automatically. # To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End Recording. MBUX multimedia system 273 A report may appear in the following cases: R For the Individual Recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National Border Crossed. Please observe the country-specific regulations on video recording. message appears. This function is not available in all countries. R The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Telephone Telephony ▌Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around 274 MBUX multimedia system and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 110) Bluetooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. R MAP (Message Access Profile) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect MBUX multimedia system 275 ▌Telephone menu overview 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con2 3 4 5 nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) Battery status of the connected mobile phone Signal strength of the mobile phone network Options 6 7 8 9 Device manager Messages Numerical pad Contact search ▌Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®. 276 MBUX multimedia system R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the mobile phone in the foreground. You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background. ▌Connecting a mobile phone Requirements R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Searching for a mobile phone Select í. # Select Connect New Device. R # Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pairing. # Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone. ▌Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accept a call k End Call i Create Confer. Call Accept or reject a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Saving a contact as a favorite Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message MBUX multimedia system 277 Mercedes me app Mercedes me calls ▌Making a call via the overhead control panel # Press me button 1. Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it briefly. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. 1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes me call ▌Information about the Mercedes me call A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 277). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R R R Operating the vehicle Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Other products and services from MercedesBenz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 279). ▌Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system Requirements R Access to a mobile phone network is available. R The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display. 278 MBUX multimedia system Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. R ▌Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center after automatic accident or breakdown detection If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. Find out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if this functions is available in your country. In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds. % The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle. In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz customer center. Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. Requirements for collision detection in the context of accident management: R The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551). R The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882). R The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54). The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect. # Select Call. R The vehicle data is sent automatically (/ page 281). R The Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your call and organizes the breakdown and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls (/ page 285). % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz customer center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz customer center with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. MBUX multimedia system 279 The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again. ▌Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz customer center. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. ▌Data transferred during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider. R The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology R R The activated Mercedes me connect services The service selected in the voice control system % The scope of the transmitted data depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times. Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activated, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle 280 MBUX multimedia system If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Mercedes me connect ▌Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services. You can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button) The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centers are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 277). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz customer center using the multimedia system (/ page 277). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the MBUX multimedia system 281 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 285). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com ▌Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management % Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether this function is available in your country. The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 285) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- R R R dent and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries. Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 278) In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz customer center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz customer center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system. Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 284). More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com 282 MBUX multimedia system ▌Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice control system R The activated Mercedes me connect services You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account R R R Deleting a connection between a user account Mercedes me and the vehicle Calling up the Mercedes me services Calling up apps such as In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability Web browser overview The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. MBUX multimedia system 283 1 2 3 4 5 6 URL entry Bookmarks Web page, back Web page, forwards To refresh/stop Options % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Overview of Smartphone Integration With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected via Bluetooth® to the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable. 284 MBUX multimedia system Apps for Smartphone Integration R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto % For safety reasons, the first activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied. You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto from the device manager. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to optimize communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 264). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument display R Drive type The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in MBUX multimedia system 285 the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call system data transmission" section that follows (/ page 286). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication module. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me connect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The vehicle must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty. You can recognize a malfunction in the emergency call system by the following displays: R A corresponding message will also appear in the Instrument Display. R The Me button lights up red continuously. Triggering an automatic Mercedes‑Benz emergency call Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system triggers an emergency call automatically in the following cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an emergency stop automatically initiated by Active Emergency Stop Assist 286 MBUX multimedia system The emergency call has been made: A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 277). # To use voice control: use the Voice Control System voice commands. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # R R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Using the multifunction steering wheel: select ~. Depress the button for several seconds. Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data MBUX multimedia system 287 R R R R R R R R R GPS position data on the route (a few 300 feet (100 m) before the incident) Direction of travel Vehicle identification number Vehicle drive type Number of people detected in the vehicle Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically Time of the accident Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be determined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. 288 MBUX multimedia system Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu Symbol Designation Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. : Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. R 9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. ß Options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. MBUX multimedia system 289 Symbol Designation Function Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode. The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files Authorizing a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback Requirements: Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. R R R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media Bluetooth® 5 Bluetooth 5 ª With audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system. Authorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system. # 290 MBUX multimedia system Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established. Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu Symbol Designation Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent. MBUX multimedia system 291 Symbol Designation Function HD HD radio™ Select to switch the HD Radio™ function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. 8 Silent function Select to switch off the sound. f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets. 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn radio. 292 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favorite. 6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback. 5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing commercial-free music, sports, news and entertainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. MBUX multimedia system 293 Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult content R Set alarm program for music and sport alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seamlessly 5 Playback control Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode. 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. Depending on the frequency band selected, different functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. Calling up TuneIn Radio Requirements 294 MBUX multimedia system R R R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. % Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Setting up satellite radio Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Options # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current subscription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Alerts 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the Live program. Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O. Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert. MBUX multimedia system 295 # Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Activating sports information Activate Activate Sports Alerts O. # Setting a sport alert Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog window. # Deleting individual sports and music alerts Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries. All highlighted alerts are deleted. # Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries. All alerts are deleted. Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume Automatic adjustment Burmester® surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only) R Sound profiles R Volume Automatic adjustment 296 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the time or distance remaining before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the G back button on the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying the service due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button G on the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer (/ page 245). Information on regular maintenance work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service intervals. # Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Maintenance and care 297 R R When the engine is often left idling for long periods Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. If subject to increased stress, check the tires more. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 296). Maintenance Management Notes about Maintenance Management If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer center. The customer center transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http:// www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. % The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer center via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system. % Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether this function is available in your country. Data transferred when using Maintenance Management When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as malfunction detection and malfunction rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use". % Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Telediagnosis Notes about Telediagnosis % This service is not available in all countries. 298 Maintenance and care The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnosis service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer center depending on the fault detected. The customer center transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http:// www.mercedes.me. For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz customer center. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer center for assistance. % The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence. % Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and recommendations for action transmitted to the customer center and the service partners. MercedesBenz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment. Data transferred when using Telediagnostics When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as malfunction detection and malfunction rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use". % The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times. Engine compartment Active hood (pedestrian protection) ▌Operation of the active hood (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active hood reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the hood is raised by approximately 3 in (80 mm). After being triggered, the active hood remains in the raised position. Limited visibility due to the raised hood cannot be ruled out. After the active hood has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited. Have the full functionality of the active hood restored immediately in a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive carefully to a qualified specialist workshop. If a safe continued journey is not possible, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Maintenance and care 299 Opening and closing the hood & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of movement. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Observe the following if you must open the hood: # # # # Switch off the vehicle. Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewelery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching live components The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on. The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Fuel injectors 300 Maintenance and care R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors Opening the hood & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the hood. # # To release the hood, pull on handle 1. Push handle 2 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood until it opens automatically. Closing the hood # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. Maintenance and care 301 # If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Engine oil ▌Checking the engine oil level using the oil dipstick Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in different locations. The waiting time before checking the oil level when the engine is at normal operating temperature is five minutes. # # & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment # Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide tube as far as it will go and pull it out again after approximately three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2 and 3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or below. R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2. If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt (1 liter) of engine oil. If the oil level is too high, drain off excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▌Checking the engine oil level using the onboard computer Requirements R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed. Requirements R The engine has an oil dipstick. If not, the engine oil level can be checked only with the on-board computer (/ page 301) . # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe off. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 302 Maintenance and care 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level One of the following messages will appear on the instrument display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. # R R # R Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is below "min": Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is above "max": # R # R Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood. # ▌Adding engine oil & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives # & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals. Do not use additives. Maintenance and care 303 Checking the coolant level * NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may also be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant # # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 301). If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure. 304 Maintenance and care # Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm) over the marker bar 2. If necessary, refill with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant (/ page 371). # Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system # # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant temperature display on the instrument display. The coolant temperature must be in the bottom quarter of the temperature indicator. Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. Maintenance and care 305 Keeping the air/water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves. Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle Remove cap 1 by the tab. Add washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield washer fluid (/ page 372). # # The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # During towing. # In a car wash. * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. 306 Maintenance and care # # Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The 360° Camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R The key is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate could open unintentionally. R For car washes with a conveyor system: - Neutral i is engaged. If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. Park position j will otherwise be engaged automatically. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Information on using a power washer & WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with roundspray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a power washer: R The key is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative films: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the film-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around while cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C). R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or louvers. Maintenance and care 307 Washing the vehicle by hand Paint Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Have film attached to the bumper only at a qualified specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. R * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays). # Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 308). Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Matt finish R Use only care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Have film attached to the bumper only at a qualified specialist workshop. R R R R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. Use only car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. Do not use any car wash program with a final hot wax treatment. Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products or gloss preservers, e.g. wax. In the event of paintwork damage: Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 186). R Notes on cleaning decorative films Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care" (/ page 307). They also apply to matte decorative films. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage. Cleaning For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive R 308 Maintenance and care R R R R R substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz). Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably. If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Avoiding damage to the decorative film R The service life and color of decorative films are impaired by: Sunlight Temperature (e.g. hot air blower) Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products Do not use polish on matte decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface. Do not treat matte or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur. - - R R Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer. In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed. % Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center). Notes on care of car parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts: Wheels and rims Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake disks and brakepads will warm up and dry out. R Maintenance and care 309 Windows * NOTE Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components. # Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible. # Immediately absorb any excess fluids. R R Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows. % After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or glare spots. % Remove external fogging or dirt on the windshield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 186). Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 186). R When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 140). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. Rear view camera and 360° Camera R To open the rear camera cover, switch on the vehicle. R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a power washer. % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often. Notes on care of the interior Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). R Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. 310 Maintenance and care # Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care: Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F (80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display: R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFTLCD). Do not use any other agents. Head-up display R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Plastic trim Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim. Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R * NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # R R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish. Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care 311 R R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change. Genuine leather seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers. R For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. R % Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change. Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and aging damage and thus significantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolor the leather. DINAMICA seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Imitation leather seat covers R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap R R R solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean. Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not use a microfiber cloth. Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. Fabric seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfiber cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean. R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. R 312 Breakdown assistance Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in the stowage compartments in the driver's and front passenger door. # Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored. 3 4 5 6 7 Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are fulfilled only if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded, e.g. due to continued exposure to sunlight. Dispose of the reflective safety jacket in an environmentally responsible manner: R To do so, contact your local waste disposal company. 1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature Warning triangle ▌Removing the warning triangle # Remove warning triangle 1. Breakdown assistance 313 ▌Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit (soft sided) overview Flat tire Notes on flat tires & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire # # A flat tire severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper pressstud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft-sided) 1 is located in the cargo compartment on the left in the stowage net. % On vehicles with Burmester® Surround Sound System, first-aid kit (soft-sided) is located in the trunk when the vehicle is delivered. Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires). 314 Breakdown assistance In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 314). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 315). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 277). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 355). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the handling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP® intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls # After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist # workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. However, the affected tire must not show signs of clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure monitoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Breakdown assistance 315 Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure. You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant 1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire inflation compressor Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the cargo floor. TIREFIT kit storage location Using the TIREFIT kit The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo floor. Requirements R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflator compressor are ready for use (/ page 315). R TIREFIT sticker is present. R Gloves are present. The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the tire (larger than damage previously mentioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R After journeys with very low tire pressure or with flat tires # # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with 316 Breakdown assistance the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contaminated with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. * NOTE Overheating due to the tire inflation compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. # # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a qualified specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects that have entered the tire. # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. Breakdown assistance 317 # # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire inflation compressor. # Switch on the tire inflation compressor using On/Off switch 3. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase! # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). # # # # Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 4 into a 12‑V‑socket in your vehicle. Switch on the vehicle. If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being achieved If the specified tire pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking characteristics as well as the driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. 318 Breakdown assistance # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tire. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a tire sealed with tire sealant. * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # + Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # # # Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. Breakdown assistance 319 Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery # # # # # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bottle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # # In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R R Further information on ABS (/ page 188) Further information on ESP®(/ page 189) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. 320 Breakdown assistance # # # # # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not lean over the battery. Do not inhale battery gases. Keep children away from the battery. Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when you are handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately. Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (/ page 185, 186). R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Breakdown assistance 321 Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery All vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery due to overvoltage When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. # # # # # # & WARNING Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery. Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described. During starting assistance, always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity. During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the engine running. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to a mixture of explosive gases A mixture of explosive gases can escape from the battery during charging and jump starting. # # # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. Make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Do not stand over the battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance. If the indicator/warning lamps on the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting char- 322 Breakdown assistance acteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Use only undamaged jumper cables/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable R R R R is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point. The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts that may move when the engine is running. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Keep away from fire and naked flames. Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Use only battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may be provided only using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with gasoline engines: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position j. R The vehicle and all electrical consumers are switched off. R The hood is open. Breakdown assistance 323 # # # # # Example: engine compartment # # Slide cover 1 of POSITIVE contact 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow. Connect POSITIVE contact 2 on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. # Always begin with POSITIVE contact 2 on your own vehicle. During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and leave it running at idle speed. Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery. During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle. During the charging process: start the charging process. During starting assistance: leave the engines running for several minutes. During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jumper cable, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window defroster or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps: # # First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable from ground point 3 and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then POSITIVE contact 2 and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle. After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover 1 of POSITIVE contact 2. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 319). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 324 Breakdown assistance Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery that meets the specific vehicle requirements. The vehicle is equipped with a battery using AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is guaranteed only with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, MercedesBenz recommends that you use only batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way. Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods (not plug-in hybrid) * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # During towing. # In a car wash. Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Vehicles with rear wheel drive Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock Breakdown assistance 325 4MATIC vehicles R Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods. Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R the vehicle cannot be started. R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the transmission cannot be shifted to position i or if the display does not show anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 326). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation. * NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 365). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger 326 Breakdown assistance # # door; the transmission otherwise automatically shifts to position j. Install the towing eye (/ page 328). Fasten the towing device. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar # # # # # # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism . Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate tow-away alarm (/ page 90). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 214). Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched off. R The brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport # # # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 325). Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position i. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 322). # Load the vehicle onto the transporter. Breakdown assistance 327 # # # Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position j. Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS) & WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when transporting. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly # # # After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform. Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading. # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle. Towing eye storage location 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the cargo compartment under the cargo floor. 328 Breakdown assistance Vehicles with folding bench seat: the towing eye is located under a cover. Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is in a different position in the cargo compartment. Installing and removing the towing eye # # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. After removing the towing eye, snap cover 1 into the bumper. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye When recovering the vehicle by towing it out using the towing eye, the vehicle may be damaged. # Use the towing eye only for towing or unhooking the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye for towing out during recovery. Tow-starting the vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission * NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started. # Vehicles with automatic transmissions must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. Breakdown assistance 329 This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted. # Use only fuses approved for MercedesBenz with the respective specified fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the cargo compartment (/ page 331). * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The vehicle is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 329) R R R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 330) Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 331) Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 331) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 328). Opening & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. 330 Breakdown assistance # # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the hood. # # # # Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten screws 4. Insert cover 1 on both sides. Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn clockwise. Close the hood. Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit R # # # # # Open the hood (/ page 299). Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to counter-clockwise. Pull cover 1 up. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Loosen screws 4 and remove fuse box lid 3 from the top. Closing Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid 3. # Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 328). The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Breakdown assistance 331 Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Opening and closing the fuse box in the cargo compartment Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 328). Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 328). # Lift up the side panel. # # # # To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. To close: reinsert cover 1. Pull up cover 2 on the fuse box. Remove cover 1. The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box. 332 Wheels and tires Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of injury through damaged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. R R R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Minimum tread depth for: Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm) R # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 333). Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Wheels and tires 333 Notes on snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly installed snow chains If you have installed snow chains on the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front wheels. # Only install snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from a authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 224). % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 191). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires pose in particular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. # R R R Comply with the recommended tire pressures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regularly: Monthly When the load changes Before embarking on a longer journey 334 Wheels and tires R # If operating conditions change, e.g. offroad driving R Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. R Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. & WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire defects as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics Irregular wear Increased fuel consumption & WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage R & WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tires The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and loading information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 338). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 335). Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 345). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not Wheels and tires 335 permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: you can also check the tire pressure using the onboard computer (/ page 337). The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by MercedesBenz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example data. The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures are valid for cold tires under various operating conditions according to the load and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. 336 Wheels and tires Checking the tire pressure manually Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the tire and loading information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. # Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. # Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. # Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recommended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 333) R Tire pressure table (/ page 335) # Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 346). R Tire and loading information placard (/ page 338) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 345) R Tire and loading information placard (/ page 338) Tire pressure monitoring system ▌Function of the tire pressure monitoring system & DANGER Risk of accident due to incorrect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when Wheels and tires 337 the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires fitted to the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear on the on-board computer (/ page 337). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 423) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 444). The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 338). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R incorrect reference values were taught in R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source ▌Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system Requirements R The vehicle is switched on. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays will appear: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature on the individual wheels: 338 Wheels and tires shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. ▌Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system Requirements R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 333). R R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored. Compare the tire pressure with the recommended tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 335). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 333). % The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge will be higher than those # Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly fitted. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message will be shown on the instrument display. To restart, press Touch Control on the lefthand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message will be shown on the instrument display. Current warning messages will be deleted and the yellow h warning lamp will go out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system will check whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures will then be accepted as reference values and monitored. Be sure also to pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 333) # Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information placard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloaded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also Wheels and tires 339 R impair the steering and handling characteristics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. R Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 365). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pressure table (/ page 335). The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. Further related subjects: Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 339) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 333). R Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pursuant to 340 Wheels and tires the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. # (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) # (5): Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa- # ble cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailerhitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum permissible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: Calculation example for determining the maximum load (/ page 340) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 338) R Tire pressure table (/ page 335) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 365) R Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 338). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Wheels and tires 341 Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Step 2 342 Wheels and tires Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Wheels and tires 343 Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 346) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 346) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Transportation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three performance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 345) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 345) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) times as 344 Wheels and tires well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction grade & DANGER Risk of accident due to inadequate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Temperature grade & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. Wheels and tires 345 % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 350). R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). Information on the maximum tire load Specifications for maximum tire pressure % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's tire and loading information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (/ page 338). % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 specified for the tire. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 335). 346 Wheels and tires Information on tire characteristics Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 First letter(s) Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires 347 First letter(s) 1: Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. R Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in percent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R": radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias radial tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum loadbearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corresponds to 1,356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the tire and loading information placard (/ page 338) R Maximum tire load (/ page 345) R Load index Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) 348 Wheels and tires Index Speed rating ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 1 2 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the maximum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+Si" for winter tires. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. Load index 8: R No specification given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or reinforced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehicle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard Wheels and tires 349 to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is printed on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommended tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted on the vehicle at the factory. The tire and information placard contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires, the maximum permissible load and the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, any accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be printed on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. 350 Wheels and tires Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: the pressure inside the tire which applies an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from friction between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tire dimensions If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the service brakes or components in the Wheels and tires 351 brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with ones that fulfill the specifications of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage caused by non-approved tire types and sizes For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tires only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retreaded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of 352 Wheels and tires wheels and tires being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully. # Reduce your speed when driving over curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. # Avoid particularly high curbs. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes Parking on curbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tires. # Only park on as level a surface as possible. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tire-installing tools Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: There are electronic component parts in the wheel. If tire-installing tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged. # Tire-installing tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. # Always have tires change at a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, causing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use i M+S tires. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R R Legal stipulations Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. # Use i M+S tires at outside temperatures of less than 50 °F (10 °C). # Only use the tires for their intended purpose. Wheels and tires 353 Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size (left and right) on each axle. It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45°F (7°C) use winter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R R R R R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tire which is installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. When replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 333) R R R R Tire and loading information placard (/ page 338) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 346) Tire pressure table (/ page 335) Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 360) Notes on rotating wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 350) 354 Wheels and tires The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Notes on storing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Overview of the tire-change tool kit * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, forexample, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt The tire-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under the cargo floor. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located in other positions under the cargo floor. % When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately secured. The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack Wheels and tires 355 Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. R The required tire-change tool kit is available. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. # Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the normal vehicle level (/ page 224). # Switch off the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # # If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 355). Raise the vehicle (/ page 356). Aluminum hub cap Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps Requirements R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 355). Plastic hub cap To remove: # Turn the center cover of the hub cap counterclockwise and remove the hub cap. To install: # Make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. To remove: # Position socket 2 from the tire-change tool kit on hub cap 1. # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. To install: Follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). # 356 Wheels and tires Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 355). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been removed (/ page 355). Important notes on using the jack: Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point. R Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate. # Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely. Wheels and tires 357 the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the jack Position of the jack support points * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle. # Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose. # Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. # # # # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1. Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 358). 358 Wheels and tires Removing a wheel Requirements R The vehicle is raised (/ page 356). * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake disks, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. Requirements R The wheel to be changed is removed and the alignment bolt is screwed in (/ page 358). * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel * NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel. # Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning. Installing a new wheel # # # Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely. Remove the wheel. Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced. Wheels and tires 359 # # Do not continue driving. Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 350). For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when installing. * NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel. # Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 350). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the first wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screwing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing in the first wheel bolt. # # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 359). Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 358). # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise. 360 Wheels and tires # # # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm). & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. # Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 338). Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work- Wheels and tires 361 shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the load compartment. Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not install the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel. R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. % The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. % Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 333) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 338) R Tire pressure table (/ page 335) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 350) R installing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 355) 362 Technical data Notes on technical data * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics Two-way radios ▌Notes on installing two-way radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified specialist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the lowreflection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. Technical data 363 On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has two-way radio equipment installed, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. 1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fenders On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna in the front or rear roof area is not permitted. ▌Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table. Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4‑m‑ frequency band 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2‑m‑ frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70‑cm‑ frequency band 420 - 450 MHz 35 W Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G) 10 W 364 Technical data The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70‑cm‑ frequency band R 2G/3G/4G ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia and Israel Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components for Indonesia and Israel can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia and Israel" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Information about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification of small components". Information on installation clearances Regulatory radio identification and notes Regulatory radio identification of small components Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification" in the Dig- Information on installation clearances of wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Installation clearances" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle. Further component-specific information Further component-specific information can be found using the key phrase "further componentspecific information" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app. Technical data 365 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front‑ or rear axle). 366 Technical data Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front‑ or rear axle. Additional plates VIN below the front right-hand seat Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids 1 Plate with information about emissions test- 1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label at the lower edge of the windshield Operating fluids can be toxic. # When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers. # Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container. # Always keep children away from operating fluids. Technical data 367 + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following: Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant R Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating fluids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://operatingfluids.mercedesbenz.com R At a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. 368 Technical data # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: R premium-grade unleaded gasoline R E85 fuel R a mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade unleaded gasoline Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Fuel ▌Information on fuel quality for vehicles with gasoline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulfur, it may produce unpleasant odors. % Vehicles with M256 gasoline engine: if you are using 91 AKI/95 RON, there may be slight limitations in performance that have no further consequences. Refuel only with fuel that has at least the octane number specified on the information label on the fuel filler flap. For maximum engine output: refuel only with premium-grade unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with regular unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Technical data 369 Never refuel using gasoline of an even lower RON. * NOTE Premature engine wear through unleaded regular gasoline Impairment of the longevity and performance of the engine. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded premium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum design speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm. Further information on fuel is available in the following locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) ▌Information on additives in gasoline (vehicles with gasoline engine) Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brandname fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank. ▌Tank content and fuel reserve Total fuel tank capacity Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 21.1 US gal (80.0 liters) Reserve fuel tank Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 3.2 gal (12.0 liters) Engine oil ▌Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). 370 Technical data Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. ▌Engine oil quality and filling capacity Engine oil specification Model * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71, 229.721) 1) Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes) To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table with the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. Engine oil filling capacity Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain Capacity 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters) The specified filling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil filter. Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake system The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Technical data 371 Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Coolant ▌Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1 At https://operatingfluids.mercedesbenz.com R At a qualified specialist workshop # * NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -35°F (-37°C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C)) ▌Coolant filling quantity Engine cooling circuit (filling capacity with heating) Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain Capacity 13.7 US qt (13.0 liters) 372 Technical data Cooling circuit (high-voltage battery) Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain Capacity 1.4 US qt (5.4 liters) Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windshield washer fluids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washing water with windshield washer fluid all year round. Refrigerant ▌Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 366). * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the climate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R‑134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R‑1234yf refrigerant. * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant compressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refrigerant compressor oil. Technical data 373 Work on the climate control system may be carried out only at a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations as well as SAE standard J639 must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control system regarding the refrigerant type and the refrigerant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood. 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refriger- ant used 6 Refrigerant type Symbols 1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop ▌Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Refrigerant filling capacity Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 21.5 ± 0.4 oz (610 ± 10 g) Filling capacity for PAG oil 1 2 3 4 Information label (example – USA) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number Information label (example – Canada) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used 6 Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 Model E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g) 374 Technical data Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment Height when open and headroom Model 1 Height when open 2 Headroom E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 82.6 in (2098 mm) 77.6 in (1972 mm) Vehicle dimensions E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain Vehicle length 194.8 in (4947 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 81.3 in (2065 mm) Vehicle height 58.9 in (1497 mm) Wheelbase 115.7 in (2939 mm) Turning circle 1 Height when opened 2 Headroom 39.0 ft (11.9 m) Weights and loads Bear in mind that items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload. Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375 Display messages Introduction ▌Information about display messages Display messages appear on the instrument display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button G or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the display message has been rectified. ▌Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the instrument display. # Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the back button G. 376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety Display messages 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377 Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger air bag and the front passenger knee air bag have been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # # Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 47). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger air bag and the front passenger knee air bag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied 378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # # PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 47). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379 Display messages PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. SmartKey Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have the SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Á Replace Key Battery * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 68). 380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Á Key Not Detected (white display message) Á Key Not Detected (red display message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Try to start the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not detected, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 156). # Start the vehicle. * The SmartKey can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle. If the SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey is in the vehicle and is still not detected: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 156). # The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66). # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68). # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381 Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete. Key Being Initialized Please Wait Á * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. Don't Forget Your Key Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the slot for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 156). 382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Lights Display messages : Check Left Low Beam (example) : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is malfunctioning. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383 Display messages : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Headlamps Inoperative : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. Switch On Headlamps : * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Switch Off Lights : Intell. Light System Inoperative * The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 134). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 135). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start). 386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ù * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387 Display messages Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual Active Hood Malfunction See Operator's Manual C ? Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The active hood (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # 388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # A Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Close the hood (/ page 299). * The tailgate is open. & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. # _ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example) Close the tailgate. * The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389 Display messages ¥ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 304). Check Washer Fluid Wiper Malfunctioning * The windshield wiper is malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times. * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the vehicle while driving (/ page 155). Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on 390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # # # ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant level is too low. Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 303). Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # ÿ 8 Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel Level Low 8 Gas Cap Loose * The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position. Apply Brake to Shift to D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Select transmission position k. Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away * While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k. Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. 394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # Depress the brake pedal. Engage park position j. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message) * The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message) * Vehicles with automatic transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Until then, always select park position j before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395 Brakes Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 184). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 184). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 184). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on To apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 184). # To release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the condition of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: Switch off the vehicle. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically. # If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 184). If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 184). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 184). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 184). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399 Display messages F (USA only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off. # Switch on the vehicle. ! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. 400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Display messages ë Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 191). Off é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401 Display messages é Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 193). # If necessary, take a break. ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! h * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 195). - - - mph Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 194). ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 199). - - - mph 402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 196). Suspended ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 199). Off Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 196). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on carefully. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 199). î * The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative î * The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program. # Change the drive program. Not in the Current Drive Program î Max. Speed 25 mph * The maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly. 404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 205). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary. Active Steering Assist Inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more. Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 208). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R R Braking or accelerating Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 205). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 203). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # It is possible to continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # It is possible to continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 218). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 218). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 221). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on 408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¸ à ç Ä * Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on carefully. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 186). # Restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409 Display messages á Ã Ä ¬ Ø Ô Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Fog on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, fog can form on the inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular. % This fog on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on carefully. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 186). # Restart the vehicle. 410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph É Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: No faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # * NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 224). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411 Display messages ¢ Lowering É Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons: R You have selected a different drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button. * Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Vehicle Rising É * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle Rising Please Wait É Drive More Slowly * You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). 412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Compressor Is Cooling * All-Terrain vehicles: due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down for the selected vehicle level to be set. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. É * All-Terrain vehicles: the display message tells you, in drive program G (Offroad +), not to drive quicker than 22 mph (35 km/h). # In drive program G (Offroad +), do not drive quicker than 22 mph (35 km/h). É Max. Speed 22 mph (white display message) É * All-Terrain vehicles: you are driving too quickly for the G drive program (Offroad +). # In drive program G (Offroad +), do not drive quicker than 22 mph (35 km/h). Max. Speed 22 mph (red display message) É Drive More Slowly * All-Terrain vehicles: you are driving too quickly for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 22 mph (35 km/h). # To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Not in Current Drive Program * All-Terrain vehicles: you are in the G drive program (Offroad +). The raised All-Terrain level is active. In the G drive program (Offroad +), it is not possible to manually adjust the vehicle level. Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving safety systems Display messages ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415 Display messages ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). 416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417 Display messages T ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on carefully. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. 418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on carefully. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Display messages G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419 Display messages Device Detected at Diagnostics Connection See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 26). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Battery Display messages # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual # See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Drive for 30–60 mins. or # Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 322). * If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is not being charged. 420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421 Display messages # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Û Battery Overheated Stop, Everyone Get Out Outdoors if Possible Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Leave the engine running. # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out. % Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire. * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery… Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Engine Can Now Be Started display message will be shown on the instrument display. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear after a few minutes: Try to start the vehicle. # If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual * The condition of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (/ page 322). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. Engine Can Now Be Started * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423 Tire pressure monitor Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensor are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. é * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheel Sensor(s) Missing 424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages é Check Tires Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # # é Please Correct Tire Pressure Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 333) and the tires. * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 338). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425 Display messages é Warning Tire Malfunction Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire R R The tires can overheat and be damaged. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires. Notes on flat tires (/ page 313). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. # é Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. 426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # é Decrease Speed Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Engine oil Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. Check the engine oil level when next refueling. Add engine oil (/ page 302). Notes on engine oil (/ page 369). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427 Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 302). Notes on engine oil (/ page 369). 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # # 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low. 428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # # # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Switch off the vehicle. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 302). Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 369). 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine * Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # # # # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429 Display messages 5 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Instrument display Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey. Indicator and warning lamps Occupant safety 6 Restraint system (/ page 431) ü Seat belt (/ page 431) Vehicle Ù Power steering (/ page 432) Depending on the display settings, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may differ from the example shown. Engine ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 433) ; Engine diagnosis (/ page 433) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 433) 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator (/ page 433) 430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes ! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 437) F USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 437) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 437) é USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 437) J Canada: brakes (yellow)(/ page 437) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 437) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 437) Driving systems L Distance warning (/ page 440) Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 440) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 440) ä AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 440) Driving safety systems ! ABS (/ page 441) ÷ ESP®(/ page 441) å ESP® OFF (/ page 441) Tire pressure monitoring system h Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 444) Exterior lighting T Standing lights (/ page 129) L Low beam (/ page 129) K High beam (/ page 130) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 130) R Rear fog light (/ page 129) Symbols on the media display É Drive Away Assist (/ page 240) L Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 240) º Maneuvering brake function (/ page 241) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431 Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). Restraint system warning lamp & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # # ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the instrument display. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 41). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. 432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 41). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Ù Power steering warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # Note the messages on the instrument display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433 Engine Warning/indicator lamp ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving. 434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Note the messages on the instrument display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 303). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. # ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; * The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Engine diagnosis warning lamp # * The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display. Electrical malfunction warning lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437 Brakes Warning/indicator lamp F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only) ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only) ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the instrument display. 438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only) J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brake warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the vehicle is running. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ * The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Brake warning lamp (USA only) J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) # Note the messages on the instrument display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. 440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp L Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp for distance warning function * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Ó * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the instrument display. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 210). Active Brake Assist warning lamp ê Active Brake Assist warning lamp * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 210). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441 Warning/indicator lamp ä Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the instrument display. Suspension warning lamp (yellow) Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display. ABS warning lamp & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. 442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ÷ Drive on carefully. Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 189). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ESP® warning lamp flashes ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions å * The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. ESP® OFF warning lamp & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 189). 444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. 446 Index 1, 2, 3 ... (SmartKey) battery......................................... 68 48 V on-board electrical system Operating safety...................................... 23 360° Camera Function................................................ 228 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (operating unit)....................................................... 148 MBUX.................................................... 149 ABS............................................................. 188 Acceleration Kickdown............................................... 175 Optimized acceleration.......................... 158 Accident, emergency call............................. 285 Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal...................................... 67 Active Blind Spot Assist Brake application................................... 220 Exit warning........................................... 218 Function................................................ 218 Active Brake Assist Function................................................ Setting................................................... Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activating/deactivating.......................... Active Emergency Stop Assist................ Active Lane Change Assist..................... Calling up a speed................................. Function................................................ Increases/decreases the speed............. Route-based speed adaptation............... Storing a speed...................................... Active headlamps......................................... Active hood.................................................. Active Lane Change Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ Setting the sensitivity............................. Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function.................... Exiting a parking space.......................... 210 214 199 208 208 199 196 199 202 199 132 298 209 208 223 221 223 239 238 Function................................................ Maneuvering brake function................... Parking.................................................. Pausing.................................................. Active Service System PLUS......................... Active Speed Limit Assist............................. Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Active Emergency Stop Assist................ Active Lane Change Assist..................... Function................................................ Active Stop-and-Go Assist Function................................................ Active Traffic Jam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Adaptive cruise control................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ 235 241 237 239 296 201 207 208 208 205 203 204 202 135 134 136 135 Index 447 Additives Engine oil............................................... 369 Fuel....................................................... 369 After-sales service........................................ 296 Air bag Automatic front passenger air bag shu toff.......................................................... 46 Deployment............................................. 37 Front air bag............................................ 42 Overview.................................................. 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 47 Reduced protection.................................. 45 Warning lamp........................................... 37 AIR BODY CONTROL Function................................................ 223 Setting................................................... 224 Air conditioning menu Air distribution....................................... 149 Calling up.............................................. 148 Climate control...................................... 149 Ionization............................................... 150 Air distribution Setting........................................... 147, 149 Air freshener system.................................... 150 Air inlet........................................................ 305 Air pressure................................................. 333 Air suspension............................................. 223 Air vents Glove box............................................... 153 Setting................................................... 152 Air/water duct............................................. 305 Airbag Protection................................................ 44 Airflow Setting................................................... 147 Alarm system................................................. 88 All-wheel drive, 4MATIC................................ 176 Alternative route.......................................... 268 Ambient lighting........................................... 138 Animals.......................................................... 64 Anti-lock braking system.............................. 188 Anti-theft alarm system.................................. 88 Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.............................................. 88 Approval numbers........................................ 364 Apps, Mercedes me Mercedes me calls................................. 277 Mercedes me connect........................... 280 Assistance system....................................... 187 ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ 297 Service interval display.......................... 296 Service requirements............................. 296 ATA Deactivating the alarm............................. 89 Function.................................................. 88 Interior protection.............................. 90, 91 Tow-away alarm....................................... 89 Tow-away protection................................ 90 ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 193 Setting................................................... 194 Attention assistant....................................... 193 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center..... 27 Authorized workshop...................................... 27 Automatic car wash...................................... 305 Automatic car wash mode............................ 305 Automatic climate control............................ 149 448 Index Automatic distance control........................... 196 Automatic driving lights................................ 130 Automatic emergency call............................ 285 Automatic engine start/stop........................ 165 Automatic front passenger air bag shutoff Function.................................................. 46 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 47 Automatic mirror folding function................. 145 Automatic seat adjustment............................. 99 Automatic transmission Changing gears...................................... 172 DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 172 Drive programs...................................... 169 DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... 169 Engaging drive position.......................... 174 Engaging neutral.................................... 173 Engaging reverse gear............................ 173 Kickdown............................................... 175 Manual gear shifting............................... 174 Selecting park position........................... 173 Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 174 Transmission position display................. 172 Transmission positions........................... 172 Autonomous braking.................................... 210 B Bad weather light......................................... 133 Bag hook..................................................... 120 BAS............................................................. 189 Battery (12 V battery) Charging................................................ 322 Jump-starting......................................... 322 Notes..................................................... 319 Notes (starting assistance and charging)........................................................ 321 Replacing............................................... 323 Battery (starter battery) charging, Remote Online........................ 156 Belt................................................................ 38 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 221 Function................................................ 218 Bluetooth® Connecting a mobile phone.................... 276 Brake Assist Active Brake Assist................................. 210 Brake Assist System............................... Brake Assist System..................................... Brake fluid.................................................... Brake force distribution................................ Brake pads................................................... Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. Active Brake Assist................................. BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... Breaking-in notes................................... Driving tips............................................ EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)....................................................... HOLD function....................................... Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. Braking assistance Brake Assist System............................... Breakdown Changing a wheel................................... Flat tire.................................................. Overview of aids...................................... Tow-starting........................................... 189 189 370 191 157 188 210 189 157 159 191 191 159 157 189 355 313 16 328 Index 449 Towing away.......................................... 325 Transporting the vehicle......................... 326 Breakdown (Roadside Assistance).................. 23 Breaking-in notes......................................... 157 C Calling the customer center for Mercedes-Benz............................................ 277 Calls Mercedes me......................................... 277 Using overhead control panel................. 277 Camera 360° Camera......................................... 228 Cleaning................................................ 308 Information............................................ 186 Rear view camera................................... 226 Select view............................................ 231 Car key.......................................................... 66 Car wash...................................................... 305 Car-to-X-Communication Hazard warnings.................................... 270 Care Air/water duct....................................... 305 Automatic car wash............................... Camera.................................................. Car parts............................................... Decorative foil........................................ Display................................................... Exterior lighting...................................... Head-up display..................................... Headliner............................................... Paint...................................................... Plastic trim............................................ Power washers....................................... Real wood/trim elements...................... Seat belt................................................ Steering wheel....................................... Vehicle interior....................................... Washing by hand.................................... Cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting.............................. Notes..................................................... Cargo tie-down rings.................................... Caring for plastic trim................................... Caring for real wood..................................... Caring for rims............................................. Caring for the headliner................................ 305 308 308 307 309 308 309 309 307 309 306 309 309 309 309 307 117 116 120 309 309 308 309 Caring for the steering wheel........................ 309 Caring for trim elements............................... 309 Central locking system Button..................................................... 70 SmartKey................................................. 67 Change of address......................................... 23 Change of ownership...................................... 23 Changing a wheel Installing a new wheel............................ 358 Preparation............................................ 355 Raising the vehicle................................. 356 Removing a wheel.................................. 358 Removing/installing hub caps................ 355 Charging 12 V battery........................................... 322 USB port........................................ 113, 126 Wirelessly charging a mobile phone........ 126 Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL) Setting................................................... 224 Checking the coolant level........................... 303 Child safety lock Rear door................................................. 63 450 Index Side windows (rear passenger compartment)................................................ 64 Child seat Basic instructions.................................... 51 Front passenger seat............................... 61 Installing ISOFIX....................................... 56 Risks/dangers......................................... 52 Securing.................................................. 55 Securing on the rear seat with the seat belt.................................................. 59 Securing to the front passenger seat with the seat belt..................................... 61 Top Tether................................................ 58 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 52 Basic instructions.................................... 51 Special seat belt retractor........................ 55 Chock.......................................................... 354 City lighting.................................................. 133 Clean varnish............................................... 307 Cleaning Air/water duct....................................... 305 Automatic car wash............................... 305 Car parts............................................... 308 Decorative foil........................................ Paint...................................................... Power washers....................................... Vehicle interior....................................... Washing by hand.................................... Cleaning carpets.......................................... Cleaning seat covers.................................... Cleaning the sensors.................................... Climate control A/C function......................................... Activating/deactivating.......................... Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)................................. Activating/deactivating the synchronization function (control panel)............. Air vents (front)...................................... Air vents (rear passenger compartment)..................................................... Automatic control.................................. Calling up the air conditioning menu....... Climate style function............................ Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control....................................... 307 307 306 309 307 309 309 308 149 148 148 149 152 152 149 148 149 147 Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control....................................... 147 Defrosting the windshield....................... 147 Defrosting windows................................ 150 Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil................................................... 373 Fragrance system.................................. 150 Glove box air vent.................................. 153 Inserting/removing the flacon (fragrance system)...................................... 151 Ionization............................................... 150 Notes..................................................... 147 Refrigerant............................................. 372 Residual heat......................................... 150 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 148 Setting the air distribution...................... 147 Setting the airflow.................................. 147 Setting the climate style......................... 149 Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... 147 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off................................................... 150 Switching the rear window heater on/off................................................... 147 Synchronization function........................ 150 Ventilating with convenience opening....... 81 Index 451 Climate style Function................................................ 149 Setting................................................... 149 COC papers, CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY............................................................... 362 Cockpit Dashboard overview................................... 6 Coffee cup symbol....................................... 193 Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting................................................... 185 Combination switch Lights.................................................... 130 Windshield wiper.................................... 139 Combined cargo cover and net Installing/removing................................ 117 Combined luggage cover and net Attaching to the rear seat backrest........ 118 Commuter route........................................... 268 Component-specific information................... 364 Connecting the parcel net............................ 120 Convenience closing...................................... 82 Convenience opening..................................... 81 Coolant Capacity................................................ 371 Copyright License.................................................... 34 Copyrights Trademarks.............................................. 34 Cornering light............................................. 132 Correct use.................................................... 28 Cover............................................................. 83 Cross traffic (warning).................................. 240 Cross Traffic Alert, Cross traffic warning....... 240 Crosswind Assist.......................................... 190 Cruise control Activating/deactivating.......................... 195 Calling up a speed................................. 195 Function................................................ 194 Requirements:....................................... 195 Setting a speed...................................... 195 Storing a speed...................................... 195 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)................ 28 Customer Relations Department..................... 28 D Damping system ADS PLUS.......................... 223 Dashboard Cockpit overview....................................... 6 Dashcam Selecting a USB device.......................... 272 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 272 Data processing in the vehicle........................ 30 Data protection rights.................................... 33 Data storage Data protection rights.............................. 33 Electronic control units............................ 30 Event Data Recorder................................ 33 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 33 Online services........................................ 32 Daytime running lamps, Daytime running lamp mode Activating/deactivating.......................... 137 Deactivating the alarm................................... 89 Dealership..................................................... 27 452 Index Declaration of conformity Wireless vehicle components................... 26 Decorative foil.............................................. 307 Definitions Tires and loading.................................... 348 Destination entry......................................... 267 Detecting inattentiveness............................. 193 Diagnostics connection.................................. 26 Digital Operator's Manual............................... 18 Dinghy towing Pulling/towing....................................... 242 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission.......................... 172 Engaging drive position.......................... 174 Engaging neutral.................................... 173 Engaging park position automatically...... 173 Engaging reverse gear............................ 173 Function................................................ 172 Gearshift recommendation..................... 175 Manual gearshifting................................ 174 Selecting park position........................... 173 Display Care...................................................... 309 Display (on-board computer) Displays on the instrument display......... Display message Calling up in the on-board computer....... Notes..................................................... Display messages ç - - - mph....................................... h - - - mph....................................... # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................. Û Battery Overheated Stop, Everyone Get Out Outdoors if Possible... $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 247 375 375 401 401 419 421 383 400 401 382 421 399 + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual......................................... 390 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling...................................................... 426 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 427 : Check Left Low Beam (example).. 382 é Check Tires................................. 424 ¥ Check Washer Fluid..................... 389 É Compressor Is Cooling................. 412 ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off...................................... 390 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. 414 ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. 415 é Decrease Speed.......................... 426 Á Don't Forget Your Key.................. 381 É Drive More Slowly................ 411, 412 Index 453 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off................................. 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine................................... 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level.......... 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)................................ 8 Fuel Level Low............................. 8 Gas Cap Loose............................ ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. G Inoperative.................................. î Inoperative.................................. : Intell. Light System Inoperative.... 429 427 428 427 376 391 391 415 416 417 418 403 383 Á Key Being Initialized Please Wait... Á Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... Á Key Not Detected (white display message)........................................ 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)...... ¢ Lowering...................................... ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual.................................................. É Max. Speed 22 mph (red display message)........................................ É Max. Speed 22 mph (white display message)........................................ î Max. Speed 25 mph..................... î Not in the Current Drive Program...................................................... Á Obtain a New Key........................ 381 380 380 376 411 410 382 412 412 403 403 379 ç Off............................................... ë Off............................................... F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. é Please Correct Tire Pressure........ F Please Release Parking Brake....... Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery…..................................................... _ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example)................................. Á Replace Key Battery..................... # See Operator's Manual................ 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required................................................ Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.... Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual....... # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running....................................................... 402 400 395 424 398 422 388 379 419 376 386 387 421 454 Index # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. É Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low....... ç Suspended.................................. : Switch Off Lights.......................... : Switch On Headlamps.................. á Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted................................ ¸ Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty......................................... é Tires Overheated.......................... F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake................................... d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting................. É Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ É Vehicle Rising.............................. é Warning Tire Malfunction............. é Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. 420 410 402 383 383 409 408 425 399 385 411 411 425 423 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative........ Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual..... Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual.......................... Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Distance Assist Inoperative.......... Active Distance Assist Now Available...... Active Hood Malfunction See Operator's Manual........................................... Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative... Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Steering Assist Inoperative........... 407 407 417 418 402 402 403 387 407 408 404 404 Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops........................................... Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative................................................... Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'................... Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'...................... Apply Brake to Shift to D or R................. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message)........................................ 404 405 405 384 384 384 385 392 392 392 394 Index 455 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message).................................... 394 Beginning Emergency Stop..................... 404 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... 406 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative.................. 406 Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual.......................................... 389, 422 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 400 Cruise Control Inoperative...................... 401 Cruise Control Off.................................. 401 Device Detected at Diagnostics Connection See Operator's Manual.............. 419 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away...... 393 Engine Can Now Be Started................... 422 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................. 377 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................. Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning......................................................... Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... Head-up Display Inoperative................... N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away...................................................... Not in Current Drive Program................. Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary................................................... Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual............... Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 377 385 386 386 393 413 392 413 381 379 378 Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer............................................ Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling...................... Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable....................................................... Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............... Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors....................................... To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times............................ Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative................. Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 393 393 394 423 423 423 392 389 406 406 393 456 Index Wiper Malfunctioning............................. 389 Displaying road names/house numbers....... 268 Displays Home screen......................................... 252 Distance control.......................................... 196 Distance warning......................................... 210 DISTRONIC.................................................. 196 Door Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 63 Emergency key......................................... 73 Opening (from the inside)......................... 70 Power closing function............................. 72 Unlocking (inside).................................... 70 Door operating unit Function seat........................................... 14 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)............ 344 Downhill Speed Regulation........................... 204 Drinking and driving..................................... 159 Drive Away Assist......................................... 240 Drive position Engaging................................................ 174 Drive program display.................................. 170 Drive programs Selecting............................................... 170 Driver's seat Adjusting electrically................................ 95 Easy entry and exit feature..................... 107 Manual and electrical adjustment............. 93 Seat heating.......................................... 100 Driving off-road............................................ 162 Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 188 Active Brake Assist................................. 210 AIR BODY CONTROL.............................. 223 ATTENTION ASSIST................................ 193 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 189 Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot Assist.................................................... 218 Cameras................................................ 186 Cruise control........................................ 194 EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)....................................................... 191 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)........ 189 Hill Start Assist...................................... 192 HOLD function....................................... 191 Off-road ABS.......................................... 189 Overview................................................ 187 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 186 STEER CONTROL................................... 191 Traffic Sign Assist................................... 214 Your responsibility.................................. 186 Driving system............................................. 187 Driving tips Breaking-in notes................................... 157 Drinking and driving............................... 159 General driving tips................................ 159 Off-road driving...................................... 162 Optimized acceleration.......................... 158 Drowsiness detection................................... 193 DSR Activating/deactivating.......................... 205 Changing the target speed..................... 205 Function................................................ 204 Notes..................................................... 204 Duplicate key................................................. 69 Dynamic handling control system................. 189 DYNAMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indicator...................................................... 171 Index 457 Configuring drive program I.................... Displaying engine data........................... Displaying vehicle data........................... Drive program display............................ Drive programs...................................... Function................................................ Selecting the drive program................... E E10.............................................................. Easy entry feature Function................................................ Easy exit feature Function................................................ EASY-PACK load-securing kit Inserting brackets.................................. Installing/removing the luggage holder... Installing/removing the telescopic rod... Notes..................................................... EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution........ ECO Assist 48 V on-board electrical system............. ECO display................................................. 170 171 171 170 169 169 170 368 107 107 122 122 123 121 191 167 167 ECO start/stop button Automatic engine start/stop.................. ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start........................... Automatic engine stop........................... Function................................................ Switching off/on.................................... Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... Emergency braking................................ Manually applying/releasing.................. Releasing automatically.......................... Electrical fuses............................................. Electronic Stability Program......................... Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided).......................... Overview of aids...................................... Reflective safety vest............................. Warning triangle..................................... Emergency braking Active Brake Assist................................. Brake Assist System............................... Carrying out........................................... Electric parking brake/handbrake.......... 166 165 165 165 166 183 184 184 184 328 189 313 16 312 313 210 189 184 183 Emergency call Automatic.............................................. 285 Manual.................................................. 286 Emergency call system Mercedes me connect........................... 285 Emergency key Door........................................................ 73 Tailgate.................................................... 79 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle................................ 156 Emergency stop assistant, Active Emergency Stop Assist......................................... 208 Emergency Tensioning Devices Deployment............................................. 37 Engine Emergency operation mode.................... 156 Emergency start..................................... 328 Engine number....................................... 365 Jump-starting......................................... 321 Switching off, start/stop button............. 178 Engine data Displaying.............................................. 171 DYNAMIC SELECT.................................. 171 458 Index Engine number............................................. 365 Engine oil Additives................................................ 369 Capacity................................................ 370 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick.................................................. 301 Checking the oil level using the onboard computer..................................... 301 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.................. 370 Quality................................................... 370 Refilling.................................................. 302 Environmentally friendly driving...................... 20 ESC, Electronic Stability Control................... 189 ESP® Crosswind Assist.................................... 190 Function................................................ 189 Setting................................................... 191 Event Data Recorder...................................... 33 Exit warning................................................. 218 Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist.............................. 235 Drive Away Assist................................... 240 PARKTRONIC......................................... 231 Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 308 Exterior mirrors Parking position..................................... 144 F Factory settings MBUX.................................................... First aid First-aid kit (soft sided).......................... First-aid kit (soft sided)................................. Flacon.......................................................... Flat tire Changing a wheel................................... MOExtended.......................................... Notes..................................................... TIREFIT kit.............................................. Flat towing Pulling/towing....................................... Floor mats................................................... Fog lamp...................................................... Fog light (extended range)............................ 264 313 313 151 355 314 313 315 242 128 130 133 Foil covering On camera/sensors............................... 186 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 186 Folding bench seat Folding back.......................................... 104 Folding out............................................. 103 Installing and removing the seat cushion......................................................... 105 Notes..................................................... 102 Opening and closing the cargo compartment floor........................................ 104 Fragrance.................................................... 150 Fragrance system Inserting/removing the flacon................ 151 Perfume vial........................................... 151 Free software................................................. 34 Frequencies Two-way radio........................................ 363 Front air bag.................................................. 42 Front headlamps.......................................... 129 Front license plate, mounting......................... 25 Front passenger air bag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.............................. 46 Index 459 Front passenger seat Adjusting electrically................................ 95 Manual and electrical adjustment............. 93 Fuel Additives................................................ 369 E10........................................................ 368 Gasoline................................................ 368 Quality (gasoline)................................... 368 Refilling.................................................. 176 Reserve................................................. 369 Sulfur content........................................ 368 Tank content.......................................... 369 Fuel consumption indicator.......................... 171 Fuel reserve................................................. 369 Function seat................................................. 14 Fuses Cargo compartment............................... 331 Cockpit.................................................. 330 Engine compartment.............................. 329 Front passenger footwell........................ 331 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 328 Notes..................................................... 328 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory.............................. 183 Opening/closing a door......................... 182 Problem................................................. 182 Garage door openers Programming buttons............................. 180 Synchronizing the rolling code................ 182 Gasoline...................................................... 368 Gearshift Manual.................................................. 174 General driving tips...................................... 159 Genuine parts................................................ 20 Glide mode.................................................. 175 Glove box Air vent.................................................. 153 Grab handles................................................. 92 H Handbrake................................................... 183 Handling characteristics Unusual................................................. 332 HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... 77 Hazard warning lights................................... 131 Hazard warnings Car-to-X-Communication........................ 270 Head restraint Adjusting (rear passenger compartment)....................................................... 98 Adjusting manually (front)........................ 96 Lowering/folding into place from the front (rear passenger compartment)......... 97 Luxury head restraint (front)..................... 97 Removing/installing (rear passenger compartment).......................................... 98 Head-up display, Display in the windshield Adjusting brightness (on-board computer).................................................... 248 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 248 Care...................................................... 309 Function................................................ 247 Memory function................................... 110 Setting the position (on-board computer).................................................... 248 Switching on/off.................................... 249 460 Index Headlamp flashing........................................ Headlamps Automatic.............................................. Heating Activating/deactivating.......................... Panel heating......................................... Seat....................................................... Help call Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.. High beam Activating/deactivating.......................... Highway mode............................................. Hill descent control...................................... Hill Start Assist............................................ HOLD function Function................................................ Switching on/off.................................... Home screen Media display......................................... Hood Active hood............................................ Opening/closing.................................... 130 129 148 102 100 285 130 133 204 192 191 192 252 298 299 I Identification plate Engine................................................... 365 Refrigerant............................................. 372 Vehicle.................................................. 365 Immobilizer.................................................... 88 Indicator/warning lamps.............................. 429 Individual drive program Configuring............................................ 170 Inside rearview mirror.................................. 144 Installing Snow chains.......................................... 333 Tires/wheels......................................... 358 Instrument cluster Function/notes...................................... 244 Instrument display Buttons.................................................. 245 Function/notes...................................... 244 Head-up display..................................... 247 Head-up display menu............................ 248 Instrument cluster.................................... 10 Notes..................................................... 243 Overview of displays............................... 247 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 429 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating.......................... 133 Active headlamps................................... 132 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 134 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 135 Bad weather light................................... 133 City lighting............................................ 133 Cornering light....................................... 132 Enhanced fog light function.................... 133 Highway mode....................................... 133 Overview................................................ 132 Interior lighting Ambient lighting..................................... 138 MBUX reading light................................ 257 Setting................................................... 137 Switch-off delay time.............................. 138 Interior protection.......................................... 91 Internet Mercedes me connect........................... 280 Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot...................... 261 Web browsers........................................ 282 Ionization..................................................... 150 Index 461 ISOFIX child seat anchor Installing.................................................. 56 J Jack Storage location..................................... 354 Jump-start connection.................................. 322 Jump-starting............................................... 322 K KEYLESS-GO Deactivating............................................. 67 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 70 Problem................................................... 71 Unlocking setting..................................... 67 Kickdown Using..................................................... 175 Knee air bag................................................... 42 L Lamp Interior lighting....................................... 137 Lane change assist....................................... 208 Lane Keeping Assist..................................... Lane recognition Active Lane Change Assist..................... Lane recognition (automatic) Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... Language Notes..................................................... Setting................................................... Level control................................................ Light switch................................................. Lighting Interior lighting....................................... Lights Activating/deactivating the surround lighting.................................................. Active headlamps................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... Automatic driving lights.......................... Bad weather light................................... City lighting............................................ Combination switch............................... Cornering light....................................... Fog light (extended range)...................... 221 208 221 263 263 223 129 137 137 132 134 135 130 133 133 130 132 133 Hazard warning lights............................. 131 High beam............................................. 130 Highway mode....................................... 133 Intelligent Light System.......................... 132 Reading light.......................................... 257 Rear fog light......................................... 130 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 129 Switch-off delay time.............................. 137 Switching on the daytime running lamps.................................................... 137 Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off................................................... 133 Turn signal light...................................... 130 Lights assistant High beam............................................. 135 Limited Warranty............................................ 29 Live Traffic Information................................. 270 Load index Tires...................................................... 346 Load-bearing capacity Tires...................................................... 346 Loading Bag hook............................................... 120 Cargo tie-down rings.............................. 120 462 Index Definitions............................................. 348 Roof luggage rack.................................. 123 Loading guidelines....................................... 110 Loading information table............................. 338 Loads Securing................................................ 110 Locking/unlocking Automatic locking (MMS)......................... 72 Doors (from the inside)............................ 70 Emergency key......................................... 73 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 70 Opening the tailgate................................. 74 Loud sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Low beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 129 Lubricants.................................................... 366 Luggage Parcel net.............................................. 120 Securing................................................ 110 Luggage rack............................................... 110 Lumbar support............................................. 96 M Maintaining safe distance Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 199 Maintenance Vehicle..................................................... 23 Maintenance Management Notes..................................................... 297 Transferred data..................................... 297 Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 37 Malfunction message Instrument display................................. 375 Maneuvering Maneuvering brake function................... 241 Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating.......................... 241 Maneuvering assistant Drive Away Assist................................... 240 Maneuvering brake function................... 241 Maneuvering brake function......................... 241 Map Displaying online map contents.............. 270 Displaying weather information.............. Moving................................................... Selecting the map orientation................ Setting the map scale............................ Switching freeway information on/off..... Map functions.............................................. Massage program........................................ Maximum full-stop braking........................... Maximum load rating.................................... Maximum permissible load Calculation example............................... Determining........................................... Maximum tire pressure................................. MBUX Interior Assistant Overview................................................ Reading light.......................................... Search light........................................... MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode... Drive programs...................................... Factory setting....................................... Home screen......................................... MBUX Interior Assistant......................... 270 269 269 269 269 269 100 189 345 340 339 345 256 257 257 186 170 264 252 256 Index 463 Media.................................................... 288 Mercedes me & Apps............................. 282 Navigation............................................. 264 Notes..................................................... 250 Overview................................................ 250 Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 203 Standby mode function.......................... 185 System settings..................................... 260 Touchscreen.......................................... 253 MBUX reading light...................................... 257 MBUX search light........................................ 257 Mechanical key Inserting/removing.................................. 68 Media Overview of functions/symbols.............. 288 Media display Operating.............................................. 253 Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equipment...................................................... 289 Medical aids................................................... 28 Memory function Head-up display..................................... 110 Outside mirrors...................................... 110 Seat....................................................... 110 Steering wheel....................................... 110 Menu (on-board computer) Head-up display..................................... 248 Overview................................................ 245 Mercedes me App Activating on-demand features................. 22 Mercedes me Apps...................................... 282 Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ 279 Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center after automatic accident/ breakdown detection............................. 278 Calls via the overhead control panel....... 277 Information............................................ 277 Mercedes-Benz customer center............ 277 Transferred data..................................... 279 Mercedes me connect Accident/Breakdown Management........ 281 Information............................................ 280 Transferred data..................................... 282 Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 154 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call...................... 285 Data transfer......................................... 286 Information............................................ 284 Manual emergency call.......................... 286 Overview................................................ 285 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts......................... 20 Message memory......................................... 375 Mirrors Mirror folding function............................ 145 Outside mirrors...................................... 143 Rearview mirror..................................... 144 Mobile phone Notes on wireless charging.................... 126 Model type................................................... 365 MOExtended tires........................................ 314 Mounting license plate, front.......................... 25 MULTIBEAM LED.......................................... 132 Multimedia system Activating/deactivating DSR.................. 205 464 Index N Navigation Activating............................................... Announcements..................................... Destination entry................................... Displaying/hiding the menu................... Live Traffic Information........................... Map....................................................... Notes..................................................... Neutral Engaging................................................ Non-operational time Activating/deactivating standby mode... 265 266 267 265 270 269 264 173 186 O Occupant safety Air bag..................................................... 42 Automatic front passenger air bag shu toff.......................................................... 46 Child seat................................................ 51 Pets in the vehicle.................................... 64 PRE-SAFE®.............................................. 50 Seat belt.................................................. 38 Off-road ABS................................................ 189 Off-road driving............................................ 162 Offroad Score Displaying.............................................. 171 On-board computer, Operating system Displaying the service due date.............. 296 Instrument display................................. 247 Menu overview....................................... 245 Operating.............................................. 245 On-board diagnostics interface....................... 26 On-board electronics Two-way radios...................................... 362 On-demand feature........................................ 22 Online services.............................................. 32 Open Source Software................................... 34 Opening angle Limiting (tailgate)..................................... 79 Opening the tailgate using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 77 Opening/closing a door............................... 182 Opening/closing a garage door.................... 182 Operating fluids Additives................................................ 369 Brake fluid............................................. 370 Coolant.................................................. 371 Engine oil............................................... 369 Fuel (gasoline)........................................ 368 Notes..................................................... 366 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)...... 372 Windshield washer fluid.......................... 372 Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system............... 23 Information.............................................. 23 Operator's manual......................................... 21 Operator's Manual digital............................... 18 Outside mirrors Automatic anti-glare mode..................... 144 Automatic mirror folding function........... 145 Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot Assist.................................................... 218 Folding in/out........................................ 143 Memory function................................... 110 Setting................................................... 143 Warning lamp......................................... 218 Overhead control panel.................................. 12 Overview of air bags....................................... 42 Index 465 P Paddle shifters Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 174 Paint code................................................... 365 Panel heating............................................... 102 Panic alarm, Alarm Activating/deactivating............................ 67 Park position DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 172 Engaging................................................ 173 Parking Active Parking Assist.............................. 235 PARKTRONIC......................................... 231 Parking aid Active Parking Assist.............................. 235 PARKTRONIC......................................... 231 Parking Assist Active Parking Assist.............................. 235 PARKTRONIC......................................... 231 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating............................................... 234 Activating/deactivating.......................... 234 Adjusting warning tones......................... 235 Function................................................ Switching off.......................................... Parking assistance systems Active Parking Assist.............................. Drive Away Assist................................... Maneuvering brake function................... PARKTRONIC......................................... Parking brake Electric.................................................. Parking for an extended period..................... Parking lights............................................... Parking option Selecting............................................... Parking position Exterior mirrors...................................... Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... Parking service Selecting parking options....................... Parking space Finding.................................................. PARKTRONIC............................................... 231 234 235 240 241 231 183 185 129 270 144 145 270 270 231 Partitioning net............................................ 119 PASSENGER AIR BAG Status display, front passenger air bag..... 47 Payload Calculation example............................... 340 Determining the maximum..................... 339 Pedestrian protection................................... 298 Permitted towing methods............................ 324 Personalization User profiles.......................................... 259 Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 64 Power closing function Door........................................................ 72 Power supply Start/stop button.................................. 154 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 154 Power washers............................................. 306 PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection Function.................................................. 50 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Reverting measures................................. 50 466 Index PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Deployment............................................. 37 Function.................................................. 51 PRE-SAFE® PLUS Backing up measures............................... 50 Function.................................................. 50 Preventative occupant protection system....... 50 Profile Creating a new profile............................ 259 Notes..................................................... 258 Selecting profile options......................... 259 Programs..................................................... 169 Protection against collision Maneuvering brake function................... 241 Protection of the environment Driving style............................................. 20 Pulling away Hill Start Assist...................................... 192 Optimized acceleration.......................... 158 Q QR code rescue card...................................... 30 Qualified specialist workshop......................... 27 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors....................... 186 Radio Overview of functions/symbols.............. 290 Radio equipment approval numbers.............. 364 Rain closing function Sliding sunroof......................................... 86 Rain sensor Sliding sunroof......................................... 86 Windshield wiper.................................... 139 Reading lamp Interior lighting....................................... 137 Rear door (child safety lock) Securing.................................................. 63 Rear fog light............................................... 130 Rear passenger compartment seat Adjusting the backrest angle.................. 116 Rear view camera 360° Camera......................................... 226 Care...................................................... 308 Function................................................ 226 Rear window Replacing wiper blade............................ 142 Roller sunblind......................................... 88 Rear window heater...................................... 147 Rear window wiper Activating/deactivating.......................... 139 Rearview mirror Automatic anti-glare mode..................... 144 Reflective safety vest.................................... 312 Refrigerant................................................... 372 Refueling Fuel....................................................... 176 Refueling the vehicle.............................. 176 Regulatory radio identification Indonesia............................................... 364 Israel..................................................... 364 Small components................................. 364 Regulatory radio information Installation clearances........................... 364 Remote Online Charging the starter battery................... 156 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 156 Starting the vehicle................................ 157 Index 467 Replacement key............................................ 69 Reporting safety defects................................. 29 Reserve Fuel....................................................... 369 Resetting MBUX reset function.............................. 264 Residual heat............................................... 150 Responsibility Driving safety systems........................... 186 Restraint system Basic instructions for children.................. 51 Function in the event of an accident......... 37 Functionality............................................ 37 Limited protection.................................... 36 Malfunction............................................. 37 Protection................................................ 36 Self-test................................................... 37 Warning lamp........................................... 37 Reverse gear DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 172 Engaging................................................ 173 Roadside Assistance (breakdown).................. 23 Roll away protection..................................... 191 Roller sunblind Rear window............................................ 88 Side windows........................................... 87 Sliding sunroof......................................... 83 Roof luggage rack Loading.................................................. 123 Securing................................................ 123 Route Alternative route.................................... 268 Calculating............................................. 268 Commuter route..................................... 268 Navigation............................................. 266 Selecting options................................... 268 Route guidance with augmented reality Activating............................................... 268 Displaying road names/house numbers....................................................... 268 Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 202 Setting................................................... 203 Run-flat characteristics................................ 314 S Safety system.............................................. 187 Satellite radio Logging in.............................................. 294 Setting music and sport alerts................ 294 Screen MBUX (multimedia system).................... 252 Seat Adjusting electrically................................ 95 Adjusting the angle of the backrests (rear passenger compartment)............... 116 Automatic adjustment.............................. 99 Configuring settings................................. 98 Correct driver's seat position................... 92 Folding back the backrest (rear passenger compartment)....................... 115 Locking the backrest (rear passenger compartment)........................................ 115 Lumbar support....................................... 96 Manual and electrical adjustment............. 93 Massage program.................................. 100 Memory function................................... 110 Panel heating......................................... 102 Resetting the settings............................ 100 Settings................................................... 14 Side impact air bag.................................. 42 Workout program................................... 100 468 Index Seat belt Adjusting the height................................. 41 Automatic tightening................................ 41 Care...................................................... 309 Fastening................................................. 41 Protection................................................ 38 Releasing................................................. 42 Warning lamp........................................... 42 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 42 Function.................................................. 41 Seat belt warning........................................... 42 Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 42 Reduced protection.................................. 39 Seat heating................................................ 100 Seat height.................................................... 95 Seat ventilation............................................ 102 Seats, Back seat, Rear seat, Throughloading feature Folding the backrest forwards (rear passenger compartment)....................... 113 Selecting a gear........................................... 174 Selector lever............................................... 172 Self-test Automatic front passenger air bag shu toff.......................................................... 47 Restraint system...................................... 37 Service center................................................ 27 Service interval display, ASSYST PLUS.......... 296 Service, ASSYST PLUS................................. 296 Shifting Automatic transmission.......................... 174 Gearshift recommendation..................... 175 Manual.................................................. 174 Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 174 Shortening the braking distance Brake Assist System............................... 189 Shunting support......................................... 240 Side impact air bag........................................ 42 Side lamps................................................... 129 Side windows Child safety lock (rear passenger compartment).......................................... 64 Closing with SmartKey............................. 82 Convenience closing................................ 82 Convenience opening............................... 81 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 81 Opening/closing...................................... 80 Problem................................................... 82 Roller sunblind......................................... 87 Size designation Tires...................................................... 346 Skid chains.................................................. 333 Sliding sunroof Automatic functions................................. 86 Closing with SmartKey............................. 82 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 81 Opening/closing...................................... 83 Problem................................................... 86 Rain closing function................................ 86 SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal........... 67 Battery..................................................... 68 Deactivating a function............................ 67 Function.................................................. 66 Key ring attachment................................. 68 Mechanical key........................................ 68 Index 469 Panic alarm.............................................. 67 Power consumption................................. 67 Problem................................................... 69 Unlocking setting..................................... 67 Smartphone Integration, iPhone® Android Auto.......................................... 283 Apple CarPlay®...................................... 283 Snow chains................................................ 333 Socket 12 V (front center console).................... 125 115 V (rear passenger compartment)..... 125 Sound Menu..................................................... 295 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Wheels/tires.......................................... 332 Sound settings............................................. 295 Spare parts.................................................... 20 Spare wheel Emergency spare wheel......................... 360 Special seat belt retractor.............................. 55 Specialist workshop....................................... 27 speed Save, cruise control............................... Save, DISTRONIC................................... Speed control Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... Cruise control........................................ Speed rating Tires...................................................... Start-off assist Hill Start Assist...................................... Optimized acceleration.......................... Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................. Starting the vehicle................................ Switching on the power supply / vehicle......................................................... Start/stop function...................................... Starter battery charging, Remote Online........................ Starting Remote Online....................................... Start/stop button.................................. 199 199 196 194 346 192 158 178 155 154 165 156 157 155 Starting the engine Emergency operation mode.................... 156 Remote Online....................................... 157 Start/stop button.................................. 155 Starting-off aid Drive Away Assist................................... 240 Hill Start Assist...................................... 192 Optimized acceleration.......................... 158 Status display Front passenger air bag............................ 47 Steer Assist Active Steering Assist............................. 205 STEER CONTROL................................... 191 STEER CONTROL......................................... 191 Steering wheel Adjusting electrically.............................. 106 Buttons.................................................. 245 Driver's air bag........................................ 42 Manually adjusting................................. 106 Memory function................................... 110 Steering wheel heater............................ 107 Steering wheel adjustments......................... 106 Steering wheel heater.................................. 107 470 Index Steering wheel paddle shifters...................... 174 Stop and go ECO start/stop function........................ 166 Stopping Parking the vehicle................................. 178 Stowage spaces Armrest................................................. 113 Center console (front)............................ 113 Door...................................................... 113 Glove box............................................... 113 Substances hazardous to health..................... 23 Suggestions Configuring............................................ 259 Sulfur content.............................................. 368 Surround lighting.......................................... 137 Surround sound system Information............................................ 295 Suspension Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)............................................. 224 Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. 137 Interior................................................... 138 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off....... Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... System settings Language setting.................................... MBUX reset function.............................. System updates........................................... 150 149 263 264 260 T Tailgate Closing.................................................... 75 Emergency key......................................... 79 Emergency release from inside (folding bench seat)........................................ 79 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 77 Limiting the opening angle....................... 79 Opening................................................... 74 Tank content Fuel....................................................... 369 Reserve................................................. 369 Tank filler cap / flap..................................... 176 Technical data Component-specific information............ 364 Information............................................ Regulatory radio identification................ Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia and Israel...................................... Regulatory radio information.................. Vehicle dimensions................................ Telediagnosis Diagnostic data...................................... Telediagnostics Transferred data..................................... Telephone Bluetooth®............................................. Charging wirelessly (mobile phone)........ Connecting a mobile phone.................... Emergency call...................................... Menu..................................................... Notes..................................................... Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... Operating modes................................... Secure Simple Pairing............................ Telephone menu overview...................... Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® telephony............................. 362 364 364 364 374 297 298 276 128 276 285 276 273 126 275 276 275 275 Index 471 Temperature Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... Temperature grade....................................... Themes Fastening............................................... TIN (Tire Identification Number).................... Tire and Loading Information placard............ Tire characteristics....................................... Tire information table................................... Tire labeling Characteristics....................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... Load index............................................. Load-bearing capacity............................ Maximum tire load................................. Maximum tire pressure.......................... Size designation..................................... Speed rating.......................................... Temperature grade................................. Tire Quality Grading............................... Traction grade........................................ Tread wear grade................................... 147 343 259 344 338 346 338 346 344 346 346 345 345 346 346 343 343 343 343 Tire pressure Checking............................................... Checking manually................................. Maximum............................................... Tire pressure table................................. TIREFIT kit.............................................. Tire pressure monitor Function................................................ Tire pressure monitoring system Restarting.............................................. Tire pressure table....................................... Tire Quality Grading...................................... Tire sealant.................................................. Tire tread..................................................... Tire-change tool........................................... Tire-change tool kit Overview................................................ TIREFIT kit, Tire inflation compressor Storage location..................................... Tires Breakdown............................................. Characteristics....................................... Checking............................................... 337 336 345 335 315 336 338 335 343 315 332 354 354 315 313 346 332 Checking the temperature...................... 337 Checking the tire pressure manually....... 336 Definitions............................................. 348 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 344 Installing................................................ 358 Labeling................................................. 343 Load index............................................. 346 Load-bearing capacity............................ 346 Maximum pressure................................ 345 Maximum tire load................................. 345 MOExtended.......................................... 314 Noise..................................................... 332 Notes on installing................................. 350 Removing............................................... 358 Removing/installing hub cap.................. 355 Replacing....................................... 350, 355 Rotating................................................. 353 Selection............................................... 350 Size designation..................................... 346 Snow chains.......................................... 333 Speed rating.......................................... 346 Storing................................................... 354 Temperature grade................................. 343 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 338 Tire pressure table................................. 335 Tire Quality Grading............................... 343 472 Index TIREFIT kit.............................................. 315 Traction grade........................................ 343 Tread wear grade................................... 343 Unusual handling characteristics............ 332 Toll system Debiting toll fees.................................... 266 Windshield............................................. 146 Top Tether...................................................... 58 Touch Control MBUX.................................................... 253 On-board computer................................ 245 Touchpad Operating.............................................. 253 Touchscreen................................................ 253 Tow bar system Towing away.......................................... 242 Tow-away protection...................................... 90 Tow-starting................................................. 328 Towing Towing methods..................................... 324 Towing away Both axles on the ground....................... 325 Towing eye........................................... 327, 328 Towing methods........................................... 324 Traction grade.............................................. 343 Traffic information Activating............................................... 270 Traffic Jam Assistant..................................... 203 Traffic light data service Display in the Instrument Display........... 216 Turning the display on/off...................... 218 Traffic light warning/display......................... 214 Traffic Sign Assist Function................................................ 214 Setting................................................... 215 Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing..................... 242 Transmission position display....................... 172 Transmission positions DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 172 Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 326 Tread wear grade......................................... 343 TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 293 Turn signal indicator..................................... Turn signal light............................................ Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... Installation............................................. Transmission output............................... 130 130 363 362 363 U Unfastening................................................... 42 Unlocking setting........................................... 67 USB port Rear passenger compartment................ 126 Stowage compartments (front)............... 113 V Vehicle 48 V on-board electrical system............... 23 Activating, Remote Online...................... 157 Activating/deactivating standby mode... 186 Correct use.............................................. 28 Data storage............................................ 30 Diagnostics connection............................ 26 Emergency key......................................... 73 Equipment............................................... 21 Index 473 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 70 Limited Warranty...................................... 29 lock automatically (MMS)......................... 72 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 70 Locking/unlocking emergency key........... 73 Lowering................................................ 359 Maintenance............................................ 23 Medical aids............................................ 28 Parking for an extended period............... 185 Problem notification................................. 28 Pulling................................................... 242 QR code rescue card............................... 30 Raising................................................... 356 Set collision detection............................ 185 Standby mode function.......................... 185 Starting (start/stop button)................... 155 starting, emergency operation mode...... 156 Switching off, start/stop button............. 178 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 154 Towing away.......................................... 324 Transporting.......................................... 326 ventilating / convenience opening........... 81 Vehicle camera Information............................................ 186 Vehicle data Display, MBUX....................................... 171 Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT................ 171 Turning circle......................................... 374 Vehicle height........................................ 374 Vehicle length........................................ 374 Vehicle width......................................... 374 Weights................................................. 374 Wheelbase............................................. 374 Vehicle dimensions...................................... 374 Vehicle emergency start............................... 328 Vehicle equipment......................................... 21 Vehicle identification number....................... 365 Vehicle identification plate Model type............................................ 365 Paint code............................................. 365 VIN........................................................ 365 Vehicle interior Cooling/heating (Remote Online)........... 156 Vehicle key..................................................... 66 Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada................................................................ 22 Vehicle sensors............................................ 186 Vehicle start Emergency operation mode.................... 156 Remote Online....................................... 157 Start/stop button.................................. 155 Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 315 Towing eye............................................. 327 Ventilating...................................................... 81 Ventilation................................................... 152 Vents........................................................... 152 VIN Engine compartment.............................. 365 Identification plate................................. 365 Seat....................................................... 365 Vision Defrosting windows................................ 150 Voice Control System Function................................................ 255 Starting................................................. 255 W Warning system.............................................. 88 Warning triangle................................... 312, 313 474 Index Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)......................................... $ Brake warning lamp (USA only)..... J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)...... ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)........................ F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................. # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp..... å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... 441 440 439 439 438 433 434 437 437 435 435 443 442 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes........ 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................. Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)........................ 6 Restraint system warning lamp..... ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up... ä Suspension warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp................................. h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes....................... h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up.................... 442 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 440 435 Warning/indicator lamps Instrument display................................. 429 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 47 Washer fluid Refilling.................................................. 304 Windshield washer fluid.......................... 372 Washing by hand.......................................... 307 Water tank................................................... 305 Weather information..................................... 270 Web browsers Overview................................................ 282 Wedge......................................................... 354 Weight information....................................... 365 Wheel change Lowering the vehicle.............................. 359 Wheel rotation............................................. 353 Wheels Breakdown............................................. 313 Care...................................................... 308 Checking............................................... 332 436 432 438 431 431 432 441 437 444 444 Index 475 Checking the tire pressure manually....... 336 Checking the tire temperature................ 337 Definitions............................................. 348 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 344 Installing................................................ 358 Load index............................................. 346 Load-bearing capacity............................ 346 Maximum tire load................................. 345 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 345 MOExtended.......................................... 314 Noise..................................................... 332 Notes on installing................................. 350 Removing............................................... 358 Removing/installing hub cap.................. 355 Replacing....................................... 350, 355 Rotating................................................. 353 Selection............................................... 350 Size designation..................................... 346 Snow chains.......................................... 333 Speed rating.......................................... 346 Storing................................................... 354 Temperature grade................................. 343 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 338 Tire characteristics................................ 346 Tire labeling........................................... 343 Tire pressure.......................................... 333 Tire pressure monitor............................. 336 Tire Quality Grading............................... 343 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 315 Traction grade........................................ 343 Tread wear grade................................... 343 Unusual handling characteristics............ 332 Wi-Fi Setting up a hotspot............................... 261 Window Rear window............................................ 88 Roller sunblind......................................... 88 Window curtain air bag................................... 42 Windows Care...................................................... 308 Opening/closing...................................... 80 Removing mist....................................... 150 Windshield Defrosting.............................................. 147 Infrared reflective................................... 146 Radio waves........................................... 146 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 140 Toll system............................................. 146 Windshield washer fluid................................ 372 Windshield washer system............................ 304 Windshield wiper Activating/deactivating.......................... 139 Windshield wipers Replacing the windshield wiper blades.... 140 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 140 Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 333 Wiper blades Care...................................................... 308 Replacing (windshield)............................ 140 Wipers Windshield wiper.................................... 139 Wireless charging Mobile phone......................................... 128 Overview................................................ 126 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity......................... 26 Workout program......................................... 100 Workshop....................................................... 27